HomeMy WebLinkAboutSpecifications I GBD
I
GREENWAY TOWN CENTER
1
WHOLE FOODS CORE & SHELL IMPROVEMENT
RECEIVED
I AUG '22 2013
CITY OFTIGARD PERMIT SET
I BUILDING DIVISION AUGUST 21, 2013
I City of Tigard
A. ..oyes Plans
I
B _VAT: Date 61(4( 0
IOFFICE COPY Notice of Extended payment Provision:The Contract will allow the
owner to make payment within 20 days after the date a billing or
estimate is submitted. Notice of Alternate Billing Cycle:The contract
Iwill allow the owner to require the submission of billings or estimates
in billing cycles other than 30-day cycles. Billings or estimates for the
contract shall be submitted as follows:Each calendar month ending on
Ithe last day of the applicable month.
I
cAD Akez,
PHILLIP M. B L
• P RT ND, ORE ,L
tf),�� 2259
OF 00
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 SUMMARY
012605 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS
013000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
013300 SUBMITTALS
014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015713 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
017000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
DIVISION 02- EXISTING CONDITIONS
024100 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 03- CONCRETE
031000 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES
032000 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033511 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING
033713 SHOTCRETE
DIVISION 04- MASONRY
040511 MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING
042200 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
DIVISION 05- METALS
051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051213 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL
053100 STEEL DECKING
055000 METAL FABRICATIONS
055213 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
DIVISION 06-WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY
061800 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
062000 FINISH CARPENTRY
DIVISION 07 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
071113 BITUMINOUS DAMP-PROOFING
072100 INSULATION
073113 ASPHALT SHINGLES
074646 FIBER CEMENT SIDING
075400 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
August 21, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
076100 CUSTOM SHEET METAL ROOFING
076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
077223 ROOF HATCHES AND VENTS
078400 FIRESTOPPING
079005 JOINT SEALERS
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
081100 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
083323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
084229 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
084313 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
086200 UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086223 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
087100 DOOR HARDWARE
088000 GLAZING
DIVISION 09- FINISHES
092116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
099000 PAINTS AND COATINGS
099600 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES
101400 INDENTIFICATION DEVICES
104400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
111313 LOADING DOCK BUMPERS
111319.13 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
129300 SITE FURNISHINGS
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
310000 EARTHWORK
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
321123 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES
321216 ASPHALT PAVING
321313 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
321400 UNIT PAVING
323113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
328423 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
329000 LANDSCAPING
DIVISION 33- UTILITIES
334111 SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
TOC -2 TABLE OF CONTENTS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 011000
SUMMARY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PROJECT
A. Project Name: Greenway Town Center Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements .
B. Owner's Name: Regency Center.
C. Architect's Name: GBD Architects Incorporated .
D. The Overall Project consists the of an existing 1 story exterior alteration of an existing grocery
tenant.
E. Bid Package 1 - Shell and Core
1. Demolition
2. Site/Building Utility Upgrades
3. Loading Dock Expansion/Modifications
4. Outdoor Seating Area (Plaza) Planters
5. New Tenant Exterior Cladding/Facade Treatments
6. New Main Entry Feature
7. Exterior Building canopies
8. Building Sidewalks: From Grideline N East
F. Bid Package 2- Site and Facade
1. Paving
2. Restriping
3. Landscaping Islands (Civil/Landscape Materials)
4. Sidewalk Paving - Balance of Retail Center
5. New Site Pole Lighting (Poles, Fixtures, and Base Mounting)
6. Cast in Place Planters
7. Lighting at existing Piers/New Lanterns
8. New Lantern Features (5 Total)
9. New Exterior Cladding at Existing Tenant Fascia
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK
A. Scope of alterations work is shown on drawings.
1. Alternate 1: Entry Relocation
2. Alternate 2: Additional Storefront at Outdoor Seating Entrance
3. Alternate 3: Loading Dock Expansion
4. Alternate 4: Revised Exit Door Location at Gridline S/23.5
5. Alternate 5: Increase Heigh of Main Entry Canopy 4'-6"
6. Alternate 6: New Stair at Equipment(South) Mezzanine
7. Alternate 7: New Steel Support at Equipment (South) Mezzanine for Lease 250#Tenant
Equipment loads
1.03 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Owner intends to take occupancy of the project upon completion of the overall project.
B. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.
1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE
A. Construction Operations: The use of the site in construction operations is unlimited.
B. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner:
1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during
construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered.
2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.
C. Utility Outages and Shutdown:
August 21, 2013 SUMMARY 011000 - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities and tenants.
1.05 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL CONTRACTS
A. Unless otherwise noted, all provisions of the sections listed below apply to all contracts.
Specific items of work listed under individual contract descriptions constitute exceptions.
B. Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements.
C. Section 014000-Quality Requirements.
D. Section 015000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls.
E. Section 016000- Product Requirements.
F. Section 017000- Execution and Closeout Requirements.
G. Section 017800- Closeout Submittals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
2 - 011000 SUMMARY August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 012605
CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Notice to Proceed.
B. Permits and Fees.
C. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments.
D. Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time.
E. Change procedures.
1.02 NOTICE TO PROCEED
A. Upon notification by Owner that Agreement has been executed by both parties and proof of
insurance has been provided, Owner shall issue to Contractor written Notice to Proceed with
Work.
B. Contractor shall commence Work no sooner than commencement of Work date given on
written Notice to Proceed and not prior to pre-construction conference.
1.03 PERMITS AND FEES
A. Fees pre-paid by Owner:
1. Building plan check fee.
B. Fees Owner will pay for:
1. Building permit fee.
2. Demolition Permit Fee
3. All charges, fees, bonds. inspections and engineering costs required by City for all items
included within scope of Work of this Project with the exception items identified as the
Contractors responsibility.
C. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for:
1. Mechanical permit.
2. Electrical permit.
3. Plumbing Permit.
4. Fire Sprinkler Permit.
5. Deferred permits.
1.04 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor
Agreement.
B. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number
and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization.
C. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment.
1.05 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement.
B. Present required information in typewritten form.
C. Form: AIA G702 including continuation sheets when required.
D. For each item, provide a column for listing each of the following:
1. Item Number.
2. Description of work.
3. Scheduled Values.
4. Previous Applications.
5. Work in Place and Stored Materials under this Application.
August 21, 2013 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 012605- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
6. Authorized Change Orders.
7. Total Completed to Date of Application.
8. Percentage of Completion.
9. Balance to Finish.
10. Retainage.
E. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer.
F. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line
item for portion of work performed and for stored Products.
G. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and
dollar amount as for an original item of Work.
H. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment.
I. Include the following with the application:
1. Transmittal letter as specified for Submittals in Section 01300.
2. Partial release of liens from General Contractor, major Subcontractors and vendors.
3. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products.
J. Application for Payment- Initial:
1. Administrative actions and submittals which must proceed or coincide with Contractor's
first application for payment include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Listing of sub-contractors, principal suppliers and installers.
b. Schedule of values.
c. Schedule of agreed upon lump sum and unit cost values for change orders.
d. Construction schedule.
e. Schedule of principal products.
f. Schedule of submittals.
g. Listing of Contractor's staff assignments and principal consultants.
h. Copies of acquired building permits and similar authorizations and licenses from
governing authorities for current performance of Work.
i. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance coverage.
j. Initial progress reports, including report of pre-construction meeting.
K. Application for Payment-At Substantial Completion:
1. Following issuance of"Certificate of Completion" and also in part as applicable to prior
certificates on portions of completed work as designated, "special" payment application
may be submitted by Contractor. Administrative actions and submittals which must
proceed or coincide with Contractor's "special"application for payment include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. Certifications by governing authorities and franchised services, assuring Owner's full
access to and use of completed Work- "Certificate of Occupancy".
b. Test, adjust, balance records; maintenance instructions, meter readings, start-up
performance reports and similar change-over information germane to Owner's
occupancy, use, operation and maintenance of completed Work.
c. Final cleaning of Work.
d. Application for reduction (if any) retainage and consent of surety.
e. Advice to Owner on coordination of shifting insurance coverage, including proof of
extended coverage as required.
f. Listing of Contractor's incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's
Certificate of Substantial Completion.
L. Application for Payment- Final Payment:
1. Administrative actions and submittals which must proceed or coincide with Contractor's
final application for payment include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Completion of Project Closeout requirements per Section 01700.
2 - 012605 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
b. Completion of items identified for completion beyond time of Substantial Completion
(regardless of whether special payment application was previously made).
c. Assurance, satisfactory to Owner, that unsettled claims will be resolved and that
Work not actually completed and accepted will be completed without undue delay.
d. Transmittal of required construction records to Owner.
e. Warranties (guarantees), maintenance agreements and similar provisions of Contract
Documents.
f. Removal of temporary facilities, services, surplus materials, rubbish and similar
elements.
g. Change over of door locks and other Contractor access provisions to Owner's
property.
h. Consent of surety for final payment.
1.06 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
A. Submit name of the individual authorized to receive change documents and who will be
responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of changes to the
Work.
B. Architects Supplemental Instructions (ASI): The Architect/Engineer will advise of minor changes
in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract or Contract Time as authorized by the
Conditions of the Contract by issuing Supplemental Instructions.
C. Construction Change Directive (CCD): Architect/Engineer may issue a document, signed by the
Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent
inclusion in a Change Order:
1. The document will describe changes in the Work, and will designate method of
determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.
2. Promptly execute the change in Work.
D. Proposal Request(PR): The Architect/Engineer may issue a document which includes a
detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and
specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any
overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be
considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 7 days.
E. Computation of Change in Contract Amount:
1. For change requested by Contractor, the amount will be based on the Contractor's request
for a Change Order as approved by Architect/Engineer.
2. For change ordered by Architect/Engineer without a quotation from the Contractor, the
amount will be determined by the Architect/Engineer based on the Contractor's
substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work.
F. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation:
1. On request, provide following data:
a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment.
2. Support each claim for additional costs with additional information:
a. Origin and date of claim.
b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom.
c. Time records and wage rates paid.
d. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly
documented.
3. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion
of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract.
G. Execution of Change Orders: Architect/Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures of
parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract on AIA G701.
August 21, 2013 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 012605- 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
H. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for
Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the
Contract Sum.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
4 - 012605 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 013000
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preconstruction meeting.
B. Progress meetings.
C. Construction progress schedule.
D. Requests For Information (RFI)
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01305 - Submittals.
B. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Additional coordination requirements.
C. Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Contractor will schedule a meeting 1 week prior to mobilization.
B. Attendance Required:
1. Owner.
2. Architect.
3. Contractor.
4. Major Subcontractors.
C. Agenda:
1. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, inspecting agencies, and
Architect.
2. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for
payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.
3. Project Schedule.
4. Deferred Permits
D. Contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to
participants, with electronic copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by
decisions made.
3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum weekly
intervals unless otherwise dictated by status of the Work.
B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at
meetings.
C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner,
Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.
D. Agenda:
1. Review minutes of previous meetings.
2. Review of Work progress.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Review of Request for Information (RFI) Log
7. Maintenance of progress schedule.
August 21, 2013 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013000 - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
9. 3 Week look-ahead construction schedule.
10. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
12. Other business relating to Work.
E. Contractor shall record minutes and distribute electronic copies within two days after meeting to
participants, with copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions
made. Provide hard-copies at following project meeting.
3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.
B. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete
schedule for review.
1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed
schedule.
C. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.
D. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
3.04 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI)
A. During the Construction Phase the Contractor shall utilize the Request For Information (RFI)
process to request clarification or interpretation based on the following criteria:
1. Conflict within the drawings and/or the specifications
2. Insufficient or unclear information in the drawings or specification.
3. Unanticipated field conditions.
4. Conflict between field conditions and the Contract Documents.
5. If any of the issues above arise and are resolved in the field, they shall be documented
through the RFI process.
B. The Contractor shall NOT use the RFI process for the following uses:
1. To change the contract amount or schedule
2. To authorize work that will change the contract amount or schedule
3. Request to substitute materials.
4. To propose a change in the contract amount or schedule.
C. Requests For Information (RFI)shall contain the following elements:
1. Project name and location.
2. Primary respondant and secondary respondants if applicable.
3. Date of issue and allow space for revision dates.
4. Name and Company of author
5. RFI Number(sequential)
6. Subject: provide adequate detail (e.g. "Entry Door at Unit 255")
7. Required Date of Response
8. Reference specific drawings/details and specific specification sections/paragraphs.
9. Description of conflict or information needed.
10. Author's recommended course of action.
11. Potential for Cost or Schedule Impact
a. Include construction status of affected area and photo if applicable.
b. Indicate if involved materials are on site or have been ordered.
c. Indicate if recommended course of action will require demolition, cutting and patching,
etc
12. Author's attached documents if applicable
13. Space for respondant's response
14. Space to note Respondant's attached documents.
D. The Contractor shall maintain a log of RFI's that notes the following.
2 - 013000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1. Number
2. Date of issue
3. Date of closure
4. Subject
E. RFI's shall be transmitted in PDF format via email.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013000- 3
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 013300
SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Submittal Procedures.
2. Submittals Schedule.
3. Proposed Products List.
4. Shop Drawings.
5. Product Data.
6. Samples.
7. Manufacturer's Instructions.
8. Manufacturer's Certificates.
9. Construction Photographs.
B. Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment for submittal requirements for Substitution
Requests.
1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Assign each submittal a submittal number comprised of a sequential numerical number, the CSI
Specification Section number and number of the specific submission. Subsequent
resubmissions are followed by sequential numeric suffix. Example: 5-08800-1-2 = Fifth
submittal overall, the first submittal of Section 08800, second re-submittal.
B. All submittals that are submitted digitally shall be accompanied by a digital transmittal.
C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent Drawing sheet and detail
number(s), and Specification Section number, as appropriate.
D. Contractor's Review:
1. the Contractor shall perform a thorough review of the initial submital and any subsequent
resubmittals for completeness of all required information. This will include but will not be
limited to; needed dimensions, material designations, finish choices, coordination with
other work, coordination with related Change Orders (CO), Architect's Suppemental
Instructions (ASI), and Requests For Information (RFI), required LEED information,
warranties, tests, and certifications.
2. Once a thorough review by the Contractor is complete, the Contract shall afix their marked
and initialed stamp according to the findings of their review.
3. If the submittal does not have sufficient information, is incomplete, or is sufficiently
incorrect to warrant a resubmittal, the Contractor shall return the submittal directly to the
sub-contractor for corrections.
4. The Contractor shall only pass complete and thoroughly reviewed and stamped submittals
on to the Architect. Any submittal that is incomplete not thoroughly reviewed and stamped
by the Contractor shall be returned un-reviewed.
E. Schedule submittals to expedite Project, and deliver to Architect/Engineer and Owner.
Coordinate submission of related items.
F. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be
detrimental to successful performance of completed Work.
G. Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps.
H. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous submittal.
I. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report
any inability to comply with provisions.
August 21, 2013 SUBMITTALS 013300- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1.03 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. General: After development and acceptance of fully developed Construction Schedule, prepare
complete schedule of work-related submittals. This schedule shall include deferred submittals.
Submit this Submittals Schedule, correlated with listing of principal Subcontractors, as required
by General Conditions, and with "listing of products"or"procurement schedule"as specified in
"Products and Substitutions" paragraphs of Section 01600 and elsewhere in Contract
Documents.
B. Form: Prepare Submittals Schedule in chronological order of submittals. Indicate following:
1. Category of submittal (admistrative or review).
2. Note clearly if submittal is for deferred permitting.
3. Name of Subcontractor.
4. Generic description of Work covered.
5. Related Section numbers.
6. Activity or event number on Construction Schedule.
7. Scheduled date for first submittal.
8. Re-submittal and final release or approval by Architect.
1.04 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within thirty(30) days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of major products
proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.
B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or
catalog designation, and reference standards.
1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS (SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW)
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Include dimensions, identification of specific products and materials which are included in
Work, compliance with specified standard and notations of coordination requirements with
other work.
2. Provide special notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
3. Highlight, encircle or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents on Shop
Drawings.
4. Clear not on drawing if this a deferred permit submittal. If it is, include the project building
permit number and provide space on the sheet for comments and approval stamps from
the building department.
B. Shop Drawings Procedure:
1. Contractor shall submit, after Contractor's review, one print to Architect. If the Contractor
has not reviewed the shop drawings prior to submitting to the Architect; they shall be
deemed unacceptable and returned unreviewed to the Contractor.
2. When shop drawings require review by multiple parties, Contractor shall distribute for
simultaneous review.
3. Contractor shall make all corrections, including all necessary corrections relating to artistic
effect, required by Architect, and then print and distribute copies to respective trades,
Owner and Architect.
C. Shop Drawing Step Summary:
1. Contractor reviews and stamps prints.
2. Contractor sends Architect one copy and other reviewers 1 copy when required.
3. Architect reviews, notes and returns marked up print to Contractor.
4. Contractor makes necessary corrections.
5. Contractor prints accepted final mark up and distributes 1 copy to each reviewer. Refer
also to Section 01700 for Contract Closeout Record Documents.
D. Architect Review of such Drawings or schedules shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility
for deviations from Drawings or specifications unless Contractor had, in writing, called
2-013300 SUBMITTALS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
Architect's attention to such deviation at time of submission, nor shall it relieve Contractor from
responsibility for errors of any sort in Shop Drawings or schedules.
1.06 PRODUCT DATA(SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW)
A. Submit 1 digital copy in PDF format via e-mail.
B. Mark submittal to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement
manufacturer's standard data to provide information unique to this Project.
C. Architect's or Consultant's reviews and review stamps may be applied digitally and reviews
submittals returned to Contractor digitally.
D. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide copies for
Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
E. When specific LEED related data is noted for specific products (e.g. specific VOC limitations)
confirmation of that specific requirement shall be included in the product data submittal. Refer to
Section 01115 Green Building Requirements for specific requirements and forms.
1.07 SAMPLES (SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW)
A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral
parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
B. Submit samples of finishes from full range of manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and
patterns for Architect/Engineer's selection.
C. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.
D. Submit number of samples specified in individual Specifications Sections; one of which will be
retained by Architect/Engineer. When there are two architectural firms involved, provide a
minimum of one sample for each plus additional samples as required.
E. Reviewed samples which may be used in Work are indicated in individual Specification
Sections.
1.08 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS (SUBMITTALS FOR RECORDS)
A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer's printed instructions
for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting and finishing. Submit 1 digital
copy in PDF format via e-mail for Architect's and consultant's records.
B. Identify conflicts between manufacturer's instructions and Contract Documents.
1.09 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES (SUBMITTALS FOR RECORDS)
A. When specified in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate to
Architect/Engineer for review. Submit 1 digital copy in PDF format via e-mail for Architect's and
consultant's records
B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specific requirements. Submit supporting
reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be
acceptable to Architect/Engineer.
1.10 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS (SUBMITTALS FOR RECORDS)
A. Provide digital photographs of construction throughout progress of Work produced by an
experienced photographer, acceptable by Architect.
B. Take photographs each month to coincide with the end of the pay period.
C. Views: provide multiple images as required to clear show progress of project.
D. Images: Full Color
1. Distribute images digitally in PDF or JPEG format.
2. Include date photograph was taken in file name of each image.
August 21, 2013 SUBMITTALS 013300 - 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1.11 CONTRACTOR PLANS (SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW/RECORDS)
A. Submit all Plans in digital pdf format via email.
B. Contractor Quality Control Plan.
C. Contractor's Waste Management Plan and related reports.
D. Contractors Indoor Air Quality Plan and related reports.
PART 2 PRODUCTS- NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SUBMITTAL REVIEW TIME ALLOCATION
Architects First Contractor's Revision Architects Second
Review as Required Review
Shop Drawings 10 Working Days 5 Working Days 5 Working Days
Simple Review
Shop Drawings 20 Working Days 10 Working Days 10 Working Days
Multiple Review
Product Data 10 Working Days 5 Working Days 5 Working Days
Samples 10 Working Days 5 Working Days 5 Working Days
END OF SECTION
4- 013300 SUBMITTALS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. References and standards.
B. Quality assurance submittals.
C. Mock-ups.
D. Control of installation.
E. Tolerances.
F. Testing and inspection services.
G. Manufacturers'field services.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.
B. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the
manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities
specified for Product Data:
1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit
supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be
acceptable to Architect.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the
Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special
attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.
C. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or
for Owner:
1. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect for information.
2. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information
given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
1.04 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included
in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the
standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable
codes.
B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except
where a specific date is established by applicable code.
C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.
D. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification
from Architect before proceeding.
E. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor
those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference
otherwise in any reference document.
August 21, 2013 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES
A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified
testing.
B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in
accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
C. Contractor shall cooperate in full with Owner's retained testing agency to facilitate the fulfillment
of their duties
PART 2 PRODUCTS- NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Architect before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent
tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise
workmanship.
E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the
manufacturer.
G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
3.02 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work.
Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B. Comply with manufacturers'tolerances. Should manufacturers'tolerances conflict with Contract
Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. See individual specification sections for testing required.
B. Contractor Responsibilities:
1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be
used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.
2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to
manufacturers'facilities.
3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:
a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.
b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be
tested/inspected.
c. To facilitate tests/inspections.
d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.
4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring
testing/inspection services.
5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional
samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
2 - 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections
required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
C. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed
by the same agency on instructions by Architect.
D. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by
Contractor.
E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed
by the same agency on instructions by Architect. Payment for re testing will be charged to the
Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Price.
3.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or
manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of
surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, as applicable, and to initiate instructions
when necessary.
B. Manufacturer's representative shall have expertise and authority to review work and approved
completed work relative to warranty requirements.
C. Submit Manufacturer's certification of qualified observer to Architect 14 days in advance of
required observations:
D. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are
supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions.
3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.
B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Owner will direct
an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General Requirements for Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.
B. Temporary Lighting.
C. Heat.
D. Telephone and Computer/Internet.
E. Temporary Sanitary Facilities.
F. Temporary Fire Protection and Detection.
G. Temporary Construction.
H. Temporary Controls.
I. Tree and Plant Protection.
J. Security.
K. Traffic Regulation and Parking.
L. Project Identification.
M. Field Offices and Sheds.
1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY
CONTROLS
A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for temporary services and
facilities, including such items as temporary utility services, temporary construction and support
facilities, temporary controls, traffic regulations, project security and protection.
B. Existing utility services for use at Project Site include but are not limited to the following:
1. Water service and distribution.
2. Electric power and lighting.
3. Telephone and Fax service.
4. Storm and sanitary sewer.
C. Temporary construction and support facilities required for Project include but are not limited to
the following:
1. Temporary heat.
2. Sanitary facilities.
3. Waste disposal service(coordinate with project-wide waste disposal/recycling program.
4. Construction aids and miscellaneous general services and facilities.
5. Temporary enclosures.
6. Project identification, bulletin boards and signs.
7. Field offices and storage sheds.
D. Security and protection facilities and services required for Project include but are not limited to
the following:
1. Temporary fire protection.
2. Barricades, warning signs and lights.
3. Environmental protection.
E. Comply with requirements of local laws and regulations as well as Owner's requirements
governing construction, and local industry standards, in installation and maintenance of
temporary services and facilities, including but not limited to the following:
1. Building codes, including local requirements for permits, testing and inspection.
2. Health and safety regulations.
3. Utility company regulations and recommendations for temporary services.
August 21, 2013 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
4. Police and Fire Department rules and recommendations.
5. Environmental Protection Agency regulations ad requirements.
6. Hazardous Materials Safety Regulations.
F. Comply with requirements of NFPA Code 241, "Standards for Safeguarding Building
Construction and Demolition Operations" and ANSI -A 10 Series standards for"safety
Requirements for Construction and Demolition"and AGC/ASA/ASC Joint Guideline#5,
"Temporary Job Utility and Services". Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary
Job Utilities and Services"as prepared jointly by AGC and ASC for industry recommendations.
G. Inspect and test each existing service before placing utilities in use. Arrange for required
inspections and tests by governing authorities or utilities..
H. Operate services and facilities in safe and efficient manner. Do not overload services or
facilities, and do not permit them to interfere with progress of Work. Should services of
independent engineer be required to survey existing utilities for Contractors use, it shall be at no
cost to Owner. Do not allow unsanitary conditions, public nuisances or hazardous conditions to
develop or persist at Site.
I. Do not permit freezing of pipes, flooding or contamination of water sources.
J. Maintain temporary facilities in such manner as to prevent discomfort to users. Take necessary
fire protection measures. Maintain temporary support facilities in sanitary manner so as to avoid
health problems and other deleterious effects.
K. Maintain Site security and protection measures in safe, lawful and publicly acceptable manner.
Take necessary measures to prevent erosion of Site. At not time is Site to be without protective
fence enclosure(s), as required to protect general public.
1.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve minimum lighting level of 1
watt/sq. ft.
B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq. ft. lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for
security purposes.
C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq. ft. lighting to interior work areas after dark for security
purposes.
D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails,
and lamps as required.
E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction in occupied building areas.
1.04 HEAT
A. Contractor may use existing HVAC equipment during construction. Contractor shall take care to
maintain and protect existing HVAC equipment including piping, ductworks, drains and electrical
connections during construction
B. Maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F in permanently enclose portions of building
areas where finished Work has been installed.
C. Protect all exposed ductwork that is to remain from the intrusion of dust or other pollutants.
1.05 VENTILATION
A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
1.06 TELEPHONE AND COMPUTER
A. Provide temporary telephone and computer internet service on dedicated line at field office and
sheds and maintain for duration of project.
2 - 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1.07 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Temporary sanitary facilities also includes temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water
fixtures. Comply with governing regulation including safety and health codes for type, number,
location, operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities; provide not less than specified
requirements. Install in locations that will best serve Project's needs.
B. Use of existing toilets or wash facilities in work areas is NOT permitted.
1.08 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION AND DETECTION
A. Until fire protection needs may be fulfilled by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary
fire protection facilities of types needed to adequately protect against reasonably predictable
and controllable fire losses:
1. Comply with applicable recommendations of NFPA Standard 10 "Standard for Portable
Fire Extinguishers".
2. Locate fire extinguishers where they are most convenient, visible and effective for their
intended purpose, but provide no less than one extinguisher on each floor or in each
general Work area, at or near each usable stairwell.
3. Store combustible materials in containers in recognized fire-safe areas.
B. Develop and supervise overall fire prevention and first-aid fire protection program for personnel
at Project Site:
1. Review needs with local fire department officials and establish procedures to be followed.
2. Post warning and information and enforce strict discipline.
3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection
facilities, stairways and other access routes for fighting fires.
4. Prohibit smoking in building interiors except in designated areas.
5. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and
similar sources of ignition for fire.
6. Contractor shall ensure that contractor's employees are familiar with Owner's fire
procedures and location of fire hydrants and extinguishers in adjacent parts of buildings or
areas near construction area.
1.09 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION
A. Construction Aids:
1. Design, construct and maintain construction aids and miscellaneous general services
facilities as needed to accommodate performance of Work. Construction aids and
miscellaneous general services and facilities include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Temporary stairs and ladders.
b. Guardrails and barriers.
c. Walkways.
2. Provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate for proper, safe or efficient
performance of Work.
3. Install and maintain temporary walkways around work and to field offices, toilets and
similar areas. Construct walkways of gravel or duckboard units.
B. Barriers:
1. Comply with recognized standards and code requirements for erection of substantially
adequate barriers where needed to prevent accidents and losses. Paint with appropriate
colors, graphics and warning signs to inform construction personnel and public of hazard
of concern. Provide lighting and flashing signals as required.
2. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas to allow for Owner's
use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from
construction operations and demolition.
3. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public
rights-of-way and for public access to existing building.
4. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage.
August 21, 2013 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
C. Fencing:
1. Where fencing is required, install general enclosure fence with suitable lock for gates.
Locate where indicated on Drawings or as required to substantially complete enclosure
around Site or staging/construction operations. Install in manner that will prevent
unauthorized persons from easily entering Site. Except when otherwise directed, provide
open-mesh, chain-link fencing with posts substantially set in ground, or in moveable
concrete blocks.
D. Protection of Installed Work:
1. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual
Specification Sections.
2. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in
immediate work area to minimize damage.
3. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or
movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
4. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is
necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material
manufacturer.
5. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.
1.10 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
A. Pollution Control:
1. Provide general protection facilities, operate temporary facilities, conduct construction
activities, and enforce strict discipline for personnel on Site by methods which comply with
environmental regulations, and that minimize possibility that air, water and subsoil may be
contaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable effects may occur from performance of
Work.
2. Comply with Department of Environmental Quality Oregon Administrative Rules, Chapter
340, Division 21, regarding containment of"dust, fumes, gases, mist, odorous materials,
vapors or any combination thereof not easily given to measurements, collection and
treatment by conventional pollution control methods". This includes but is not limited to
sandblasting, stockpiles of soil, acid washes and material deposited in streets.
3. Contractor shall provide or pay others to perform any clean-up operation or damages
sustained due to failure to provide or coordinate requirements of this article. Obtain and
pay for permits as required for pollution control activities.
4. Comply with South Waterfront Central District Master Erosion Control Plan.
B. Noise Control:
1. Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate and effective mufflers, sound barriers and
controls for all construction equipment so that noise from this equipment can be controlled
to satisfaction of Owner. Coordinate with Owner when construction work requires use of
air hammers or other objectionable noisy equipment.
C. Dust Control:
1. All streets, roads or detours used for hauling materials shall be watered as required to
prevent dust. Dust prevention measures, both indoors and outdoors shall be continuous
until Final Acceptance by Owner.
2. Provide interior dust control measures, such as temporary partitions, taping of air spaces
at doors, maintenance of filters and protection of ducts, etc., as required to control dust.
Coordinate to prevent accidental activation of particulate-sensing fire detection system as
described under requirements for Hot Work Permit.
1.11 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. Take adequate precautions to protect existing landscaped areas including all existing plantings
and irrigation system components from damage during construction.
4-015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. Contractor shall submit digital photographic documentation of existing site landscaping prior to
commencing work.
1.12 SECURITY
A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from
unauthorized entry, vandalism or theft.
1.13 TRAFFIC REGULATION AND PARKING
A. Traffic Control:
1. Traffic control on site is under direction of the Contractor or a designated representative.
Traffic control includes coordination of street use for transportation and stockpiling of
construction materials. Contractor is required to adhere to all rules and regulations
pertaining to routing of traffic, vehicle speeds and other established conditions and
restrictions.
2. Comply with all rules and regulations of City, State and County authorities regarding
closing of public streets to use by public traffic, including pedestrians. No road shall be
closed to public except by expressed by permission by authority having jurisdiction.
Control obstructions and hazards with approved signs, barricades and lights where
necessary to protect safety of public. Convenience of general public adjacent to Project,
protection of persons and property, and access of emergency vehicles are of prime
importance and shall be provided for in satisfactory manner.
B. Flagging Services:
1. Contractor shall provide trained flaggers and barricade hazardous operations during
construction activities in street areas, as directed by Director of Design and Construction
Services or authorized representative. Equip flaggers and guards on duty with approved
red work apparel and stop/slow paddle kept clean and in good condition.
2. If Contractor fails to provide safe, competent and alert flagging services, Contractor may
be relieved of flagging duties and be required to pay fees for provisions of flagging
services by Owner-AT CONTRACTOR'S COST.
3. Utilize traffic control cones, drums, flares and lights which are approved by local
jurisdiction. Use flares and lights during hours of low visibility to delineate traffic lanes and
to guide traffic.
C. Temporary Use of Roads:
1. Provide detours necessary for unimpeded traffic flow.
2. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
3. Maintain top priority for access of emergency vehicles.
D. Construction Parking Control:
1. Parking on site is to be coordinated and approved by Owner's Representative.
1.14 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A. Project Identification Sign:
1. One painted sign, 48 sq ft area, bottom 6 feet above ground.
2. Content:
a. Project title, logo and name of Owner as indicated on Contract Documents.
b. Names and titles of Architect and Consultants.
c. Name of Prime Contractor .
3. Graphic Design, Colors, Style of Lettering: Designated by Architect.
4. Lettering: Series C of Standard Alphabet for Highway Signs, Public Roads Administration,
Federal Works Agency.
B. Project Informational Signs:
1. Painted informational signs of same colors and lettering as Project Identification sign, or
standard products; size lettering to provide legibility at 100 foot distance.
2. Provide at each field office, storage shed, and directional signs to direct traffic into and
within site. Relocate as Work progress requires.
August 21, 2013 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000- 5
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3. Provide municipal traffic agency directional traffic signs to and within site.
1.15 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
A. Storage and sheds shall be located to allow access and orderly provision for maintenance and
inspection of products.
B. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water or snow.
C. At completion of Work, remove buildings, foundations, utility service and debris. Restore area
to prior condition.
D. Provide and maintain field office with conference space for weekly Progress Meetings.
Minimum requirements include 10 x 18 conference space furnished with 10'-0"table and 12
chairs. Provide adequate utilities for light and heat. Provide adequate housekeeping. At
Contractor's option equivalent facilities may be provided within the existing structure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
6 -015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 015713
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities.
B. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers
due to construction activities.
C. Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures.
D. Compensation of Owner for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to non-compliance
by Contractor.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. EPA 832-R-92-005- Storm Water Management for Construction Activities; U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency; 1992.
B. Clean Water Services Design and Construction Standards for Sanitary and Surface Water
Management-June 2007
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Best Management Practices Standard: EPA 832-R-92-005.
B. Follow the Erosion and Sedimentation Prevention Plan and submit periodic inspection reports.
C. Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover until
applicable permits have been obtained; furnish all documentation required to obtain applicable
permits.
D. Timing: Base erosion control measures shall be in place prior to any ground disturbance. Put
preventive measures in place as soon as possible after disturbance of surface cover and before
precipitation occurs.
E. Storm Water Runoff: Control increased storm water runoff due to disturbance of surface cover
due to construction activities for this project.
1. Prevent runoff into storm and sanitary sewer systems, including open drainage channels,
in excess of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction,whichever
is less.
2. Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term and 24-hour rainfall events
that might occur in 25 years.
F. Erosion On Site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due to
construction activities for this project.
1. Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil.
2. Prevent development of ruts due to equipment and vehicular traffic.
3. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at
no cost to Owner.
G. Erosion Off Site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused
by water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project.
1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site.
2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site.
3. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements.
4. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at
no cost to Owner.
H. Sedimentation of Waterways On Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways on the project site,
including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary
sewers.
August 21, 2013 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 015713- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to
Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. If sediment basins are used as temporary preventive measures, pump dry and remove
deposited sediment after each storm.
I. Open Water: Prevent standing water that could become stagnant.
J. Maintenance: Maintain temporary preventive measures until permanent measures have been
established.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Provide all documentation required by the Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan.
C. On a monthly basis, document and submit photographs of the perimeter of the site showing
erosion and sedimentation control infrastructure in place.
D. Certification that Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan has been followed.
E. Inspection Reports: Submit report of each inspection; identify each preventive measure, indicate
condition, and specify maintenance or repair required and accomplished.
PART 2 PRODUCTS- NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
3.01 MAINTENANCE
A. Inspect preventive measures weekly, within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces
0.5 inches or more rainfall at the project site, and daily during prolonged rainfall.
B. Repair deficiencies immediately.
C. Clean out temporary sediment control structures weekly and relocate soil on site.
D. Place sediment in appropriate locations on site; do not remove from site.
3.02 CLEAN UP
A. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted
to remain by Architect.
B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures.
C. Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an
acceptable grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces.
END OF SECTION
2- 015713 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Definitions.
B. Products.
C. Transportation and Handling.
D. Storage and Protection.
E. Substitutions.
F. Quality Assurance.
G. Installation of Products.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions used in this section are not intended to negate meaning of other terms used in
Contract Documents, including such terms as "specialties", "systems", "structure", "finished",
"accessories", "furnishings", "special construction", and similar terms. Such terms are
self-explanatory and have recognized meanings in construction industry:
1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in Work, regardless of whether they were
specifically purchased for Project or taken from Contractor's previously purchased stock.
"Product", as used herein, includes "material", "equipment", "system"and other terms of
similar intent.
2. "Named products"are products identified by use of manufacturer's name for product,
including such items as make or model designation, as recorded in published product
literature, of latest issue as of date of Contract Documents.
3. "Materials"are products that must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished,
refined or otherwise fabricated, processed or installed to form units of Work.
4. "Equipment" is defined as product with operational parts, regardless of whether motorized
or manually operated, and in particular, product that requires service connections such as
wiring or piping.
1.03 PRODUCTS
A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures and systems
forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication,
conveying and erection of the Work. products may also include existing materials or
components required for reuse.
B. Contractor's options in select products are limited by requirements of Contract Documents and
governing regulations. They are not controlled by industry traditions or procedures experienced
by Contractor on previous construction projects. Required procedures include, but are not
limited to the following for various indicated methods of specifying:
1. Proprietary and semi-proprietary specification requirements:
a. Single Product Name: Where only single product or manufacturer is named provide
product indicated, unless Specification indicates possible consideration of other
products.
b. Two or more product names: Where two or more products or manufacturers are
named, provide one of products named, at Contractor's option. Exclude products that
do not comply with Specifications requirements. Do not provide or offer to provide
unnamed products, unless Specifications indicate possible consideration of other
products.
c. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by term "or
approved", comply with Contract Documents provisions concerning "substitutions" to
obtain approval from Architect for use of unnamed product.
August 21, 2013 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
2. Non-proprietary Specifications Requirements: Where Specifications name products or
manufacturers that are available and may be incorporated in Work, but do not restrict
Contractor to use of these products only, Contractor may, at the Contractor's option, use
any available product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with substitution
requirements article 1.06 of this Section.
3. Descriptive Specifications Requirements: Where Specifications describe product or
assembly generically, in detail, listing exact characteristics required, but without use of
brand or trade name, provide products or assemblies that provide characteristics indicated
and otherwise comply with Contract requirements.
4. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with
indicated performance requirements, provide products that comply with indicated
performance requirements, and are recommended by manufacturer for indicated
application. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product
literature or by manufacturer's individual certification of performance. General overall
performance of product is implied where product is specified for specific performance.
5. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where Specifications require
compliance with imposed standard, code or regulation, Contractor has option of selecting
product that complies with Specifications requirements, including standards, codes and
regulations.
6. Visual Matching: Where matching established sample is required, final judgement of
whether product proposed by Contractor matches sample satisfactorily will be determined
by Architect. Where there is no product available within specified product category that
matches sample satisfactorily and also complies with other specified requirements, comply
with provisions of Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" and "change orders"for
selection of matching products in another product category or for non-compliance with
specified requirements.
7. Visual Selection: Except as otherwise indicated, where specified product requirements
include phrase "as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures"or
similar phrases, Contractor has option of selecting product and manufacturer, provided
selection complies with other specified requirements. Architect is subsequently
responsible for selecting color, pattern and texture from product line selected by
Contractor.
C. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically
permitted by Contract Documents.
D. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components.
E. General Product Requirements:
1. Provide products that comply with requirements of Contract Documents and that are
undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at time of installation. Provide
products that are complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other
devices and details needed for complete installation and for intended use and effect.
2. Where they are available, provide standard products of types that have been produced
and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Where, because of nature of its application, Owner is likely to need replacement or
additional amounts of product at later date, either for maintenance and repair, or
replacement, provide standard, domestically produced products for which manufacturer
has published assurances that products and parts are likely to be available to Owner at
later date.
4. Except as otherwise indicated for required labels and operating data, do not permanently
attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's name plates or trademarks on exposed
surfaces of products which will be exposed to view either in occupied spaces or on exterior
of completed project.
5. Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surface or, where required for
observation after installation, on accessible surface which, in occupied spaces, is not
conspicuous.
2 - 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
6. Provide permanent engraved metal or laminated nameplate each item of
service-connected, power-operated equipment or electrical outlet. Locate nameplate on
easily accessible surface which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. Nameplate shall
contain following information and other essential operating data:
a. Name of manufacturer.
b. Name of product.
c. Model number.
d. Serial number.
e. Capacity.
f. Speed.
g. Rating.
7. For power outlets, verify information with Owner's representative.
1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, handle and store products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using
means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. Control
delivery schedules to minimize long-term storage at Site and to prevent overcrowding of
construction areas. In particular, coordinate delivery and installation to ensure minimum or
storage times for items known or recognized to be flammable, hazardous, easily damaged,
valuable or sensitive to theft, deterioration or other source of loss.
B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are
correct, and products are undamaged.
C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,with seals and labels
intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures.
B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground.
C. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection.
Coordinate off-site storage with Owner's Representative is said materials are to be included in
Applications for Payment.
D. Store heavy materials in manner that will not endanger supporting structure.
E. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to
avoid condensation.
F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Provide mixing with
foreign matter.
G. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement or damage.
H. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure
products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.
1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Contractor's requests for changes in products, materials, equipment and methods of
construction required by Contract Documents are considered requests for"substitutions", and
are subject to requirements specified herein. Following are not considered as substitutions:
1. Revisions to Contract Documents, where requested by Owner or Architect are considered
as "changes" not substitutions.
2. Substitutions requested during bidding period, which have been accepted prior to Contract
Date, are included in Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements for
substitutions as herein specified.
August 21, 2013 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000- 3
3. Specified Contractor options on products and construction methods included in Contract
Documents are choices available to Contractor and are not subject to requirements for
substitutions as herein specified.
4. Except as otherwise provided in Contract Documents, Contractor's determination of and
compliance with governing regulations and orders as issued by governing authorities do
not constitute "substitutions"and therefore do not justify basis for change orders.
B. Identified interior finishes or material MAY BE specified as sole source manufacturer in order to
comply with the owners finish plan. Substitutions for these specified manufacturer products will
not be considered.
C. Substitution Requests:
1. During bidding, Architect will consider written requests for substitutions received at least
ten days prior to Bid Date. Requests received after that time will not be considered.
2. After date of Contract, Architect may consider normal requests from Contractor for
substitution of products in place of those specified when submitted in accord with
requirements of this section. One or more of following conditions must also be
documented:
a. Substitution must be required for compliance with final interpretation of Code
requirements or insurance regulations.
b. Substitution must be due to unavailability of specified products, through no fault of
Contractor.
c. Substitution may be requested when subsequent information discloses inability of
specified products to perform properly or to fit in designated locations.
d. Substitution may be due to manufacturer's or fabricator's refusal to certify or
guarantee performance of specified product as intended or required.
e. Substitution may be requested when, in judgement of Owner, substitution would be in
Owner's best interest in terms of cost, time or other considerations.
3. Submit two copies of Request for Substitution. Use standard CSI Substitution Request
Form for all requests. Include in request following information:
a. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract
Documents, including following information:
1) Product identification, including manufacturer name and address.
2) Manufacturer's literature, including product description, performance and test
data and reference standards.
3) Samples.
4) Name and address of similar projects or installations including description of
product, installation conditions and date of installation.
b. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified.
c. Data relating to changes in construction schedule anticipated as result of
implementation of substitution.
d. When requests are submitted after Bid, submit accurate cost data on proposed
substitution in comparison with product or method specified.
e. Where LEED forms are required in the Submittal part of a Section, any substitutions
for products in that section must include the LEED information as part of the
Substitution Request.
4. In making Request for Substitutions, Manufacturer or Contractor is hereby certifying the
following:
a. Product has been personally investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all
aspects to specified item.
b. Same guarantee for specified item will be provided for substitution.
c. Coordination will be provided to install accepted substitutions in Work, including any
necessary changes in other work required for acceptance of item.
d. All claims for any added cost or time relating to substitution which may become
apparent will be waived.
e. Cost data is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract, but excludes
costs under separate contracts or Owner re-design, including Consulting fees.
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
5. When LEED Certification documentation is required in the Section for which a product
Substitution Request is being made, complete the forms and certifications for the
proposed product and submit these with the Substitution Request.
D. Substitutions will only be considered when:
1. Request for Substitution is submitted in accordance with requirements of this Section.
2. Acceptance of substitution will not require extensive revisions of Contract Documents.
3. Substitutions will NOT be considered when they are submitted as product data or shop
drawing submittals.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
1. To fullest extent possible, provide products of same generic kind, from single source, for
each unit of work.
2. If it is discovered that specified products are available only from sources that do not or
cannot adequate quantity to complete project requirements in timely manner, consult with
Architect for determination of what product qualities are most important before proceeding.
Architect will designate those qualities, such as visual, structural, durability, or
compatibility that are most important. When Architect's determination has been made,
select products from those sources that possess most important qualities to fullest extent
possible.
B. Compatibility Options:
1. Compatibility of products is basic requirement of product selection. When Contractor is
given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product
selected must be compatible with other products previously selected, even if products
previously selected were also Contractor options. Complete compatibility between various
choices available to Contractor is not assumed by various requirements of Contract
Documents, but must be provided by Contractor.
1.08 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS
A. Except as otherwise indicated in individual sections of these Specifications, comply with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in applications
indicated.
B. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work.
C. Clean exposed surfaces and protect surfaces as necessary to ensure freedom from damage
and deterioration at time of acceptance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS- NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000- 5
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 017000
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Submittals for Survey Work and Cutting and Patching Work.
B. Project Conditions.
C. Coordination.
D. Patching Materials.
E. Examination.
F. Preparation.
G. Pre-installation meetings.
H. Field Engineering.
I. Cutting and patching.
J. Cleaning and protection.
K. Starting of systems and equipment.
L. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.
M. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures.
B. Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance
data, warranties .
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
A. For field engineering employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific
service on Project, licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain
pumping equipment.
B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site
from soil erosion.
C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.
Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere.
E. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil,
water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by
construction operations.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to
ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,
with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with
building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for
installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
August 21, 2013 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
C. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work
which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and
conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces
efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
D. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
E. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work
and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's
activities.
G. Verify conditions of existing Project site. Purpose of survey is to record existing conditions prior
to construction for comparison with Contract Documents. Report all conflicts to Architect.
Architect will provide revisions to Contract Documents or issue clarifications to accommodate
conflicts. Contractor shall be responsible for remedying conflicts which could have been
prevented by timely review of existing conditions. All remedies, which vary from Contract
Documents, shall be approved by Architect or Owner's representative.
H. General Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, and for all lines and
measurements for all Work executed under the Contract Documents. Verify dimensions shown
on shop drawings and report errors and inaccuracies in writing to Architect prior to commencing
Work.
I. General Contractor shall be responsible for coordination and installation of all architectural,
mechanical, electrical and other Work. Owner will not entertain requests for delays, time
extensions or additional costs due to lack of coordination of Work by Contractor.
J. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall be responsible for layout of duct work, piping and conduit
based on reference lines shown on the Drawings:
1. Because of their small scale, electrical drawings are diagrammatic and do not show all
offsets, fittings and accessories which may be required.
2. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting Work and arrange Work accordingly.
3. Provide fittings and accessories as required to fit job conditions.
K. Prepare details drawings to a larger scale than Contract Documents in areas where Work is of
sufficient complexity to warrant additional detailing. This shall apply to all mechanical and
electrical rooms, wiring at switchboard and motor control centers, panelboard cabinets in
electrical closets and sprinkler piping layouts. Prepare drawings at same sheet size as Contract
Drawings and submit with each set of Owner's record drawings. Submit layout drawings for
approval before commencing shop fabrication or field erection, only when so directed by
Architect.
L. Slots, chases and openings through floors, walls, ceilings and roofs shall be provided by
associated trades as specified for new construction. Trades requiring them shall insure that
they are installed and properly located, and shall be responsible for any cutting and patching
caused by their omission, improper location or construction.
M. Anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and supports that are required shall be furnished and installed
under same section of specifications as respective items to be anchored, with locations as
directed by trade requiring them.
N. Sprinkler heads and other devices: Automatic sprinklers shall be installed generally throughout
all areas. Compare locations selected for all sprinkler heads with Architectural reflected ceiling
plans to prevent conflicts between trades. In cases where mechanical or electrical devices
occupy same position, Architect shall determine which elements will move. Exposed piping in
finished areas is not allowed.
O. Utilize spaces efficiently so that adequate accessibility is retained for future maintenance,
repairs, modifications and additions.
2 - 017000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
P. Relocate installed Work which does not provide adequate accessibility.
Q. Changes required in Work of Contractor, caused by Contractor's neglect to coordinate Work
with others, shall be made at Contractor's expense.
R. Do all necessary Work to receive or join with Work of other trades.
S. Coordinate Work to provide adequate clearance for installation and maintenance of equipment.
T. Installation and Arrangement:
1. Arrange pipes, ducts, raceways and equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks,
traps, starters, motors and control components.
2. Arrange raceways, wiring and equipment to permit ready access to switches, motors and
control components. Doors and access panels shall be kept clear.
3. Right-of-Way: Lines which pitch shall have right-of-way over conduit and EMT raceways.
Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have right-of-way over conduit and EMT
raceways whose elevation can be changed.
4. Offsets and changes in direction of pipes, ducts and raceways shall be made as required
to maintain proper headroom and clearances whether or not indicated on Drawings.
Provide all traps, vents, fittings,junction boxes, connectors, etc., as required to effect
these offsets and change in direction.
U. Drawings and Specifications are arranged for convenience only and do not necessarily
determine which trades perform various portions of the Work.
V. Transmit to trades doing Work of other Divisions, all information required for Work to be
provided under their respective Sections (such as foundations, electric wiring, access door
locations, etc.) in ample time for their installation.
W. Consult with trades doing Work of other Divisions so that:
1. Required related Work and information is received from them in ample time for installation.
2. Whenever possible, motors, motor controls, pumps, valves, etc., are of same
manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS
A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching
and extending work.
B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where
necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.
C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution
described in Section 01600.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work.
Beginning new work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being
applied or attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct
locations.
E. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements
subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work,
assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means
acceptance of existing conditions.
August 21, 2013 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove debris from area and from concealed spaces.
B. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of
temperature and humidity. Insulate ducts and piping to prevent condensation in exposed areas.
C. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and
finishes.
D. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
E. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
F. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to
applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.
3.03 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site
prior to commencing work of the section.
B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.
C. Notify Architect five working days in advance of meeting date.
D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:
1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures.
2. Review coordination with related work.
E. Record minutes and distribute electronic copies within two days after meeting to participants,
with copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.04 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Surveyor/Engineer Selection:
1. Layout Surveyor: State licensed land surveyor.
2. Engineers: State licensed in specific service to be provided.
B. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
C. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.
D. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points.
E. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points
during construction.
F. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required
because of changes in grades or other reasons.
G. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes
without prior written notice to Architect:
1. All such Work to be performed by state licensed land surveyor.
H. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.
I. Establish a minimum of two temporary bench marks off site for duration of the project,
referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on
project record documents.
J. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar
appropriate means:
1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement;
utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations.
2. Grid or axis for structures.
3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations, and similar elements.
4. Location of all easements, right-of-ways, wetland boundaries, drain fields, flood plains,
flight glide paths and similar features.
4 - 017000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
5. Other engineering necessary to execute Contractor's construction methods, and to verify
final grades and construction lines.
K. Layout and record lines and elevations for setting structural framing or formwork. Verify setting
elevation and camber of formwork prior to concrete placement, during placement and prior to
removal of shores or reshores. Verify beam and slab elevations after application of deadloads
to record changes in camber and/or deflection. Provide periodic reports to Owner and Architect:
1. Monitor matslab for settlement monthly during duration of project.
L. Provide necessary measurements as far in advance of required installation as possible. Verify
measurements, grades and lines indicated on shop drawings or shop installation drawings.
M. Periodically verify layouts by same means:
1. Immediately report to Contractor and Architect any variations or discrepancies. Verify
incomplete or non-closing dimensions.
2. Provide marked set of progress drawings available at site for Owner/Architect review.
N. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
O. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare a certified survey
illustrating dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work:
1. Provide final drawing to Owner for records on reproducible mylar.
3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install Products as specified in individual sections.
B. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where
new Work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition.
C. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not
possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make
recommendation to Architect.
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. General:
1. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover
work, to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or
non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to
provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute
patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit Products together to integrate with other
work:
a. Comply with requirements of applicable sections of Division 2 where cutting and
patching requires excavation and/or backfll.
2. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide
appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage
and restore to original condition.
3. Cutting and Patching performed during manufacture of products, or during initial
fabrication, erection or installation processes is not considered "Cutting and Patching"
under this definition. Drilling of holes to install fasteners and similar operations are also
not considered "Cutting and Patching".
4. Unless otherwise specified, requirements of this section apply to Mechanical and Electrical
Work along with other CSI sections. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for specific
requirements.
5. Do not perform any cutting or patching in exposed areas in any method that, in the opinion
of the Architect, would result in aesthetic damage, or leave obvious physical evidence of
cutting and patching of the area. Remove and replace Work judged by Architect to be
visually unsatisfactory.
6. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and
moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.
August 21, 2013 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000- 5
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
7. Do not cut or drill any structural work in a manner that would result in reduction of load
carrying or deflection ratios. Obtain the approval of the Architect/Engineer when cutting or
drilling the following items unless specifically addressed in the drawings:
a. Structural concrete.
b. Foundation work.
c. Retaining walls.
d. Structural decking.
e. Beams, columns,joists or headers.
f. Any other structural member or assembly.
8. Re-cover and refinish work that exposes mechanical and electrical work exposed
accidentally during the work.
B. Examination:
1. Examine existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to
damage or movement during cutting and patching.
2. After uncovering existing work, inspect conditions affecting performance of proposed
Work.
3. Beginning of cutting and patching or alteration Work indicates acceptance of existing
conditions.
C. Materials:
1. Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents:
a. Type and quality of existing products: Determine by inspection and testing products
where necessary.
b. If identical materials are not available, or cannot be used, use materials that match
adjacent surfaces to fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect and structural
integrity. Use cutting and patching materials and techniques that will result in equal or
better performance characteristics.
c. For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution as per Section
01600.
D. Preparation for Cutting and Patching:
1. Provide adequate temporary support and bracing prior to cutting any Work.
2. Properly protect other Work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Protect from
adverse weather conditions for that part of the Project which may be exposed during
cutting and patching Work.
3. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining
areas through proper coordination with on-going building use.
4. Take precautions to avoid cutting of existing pipe, conduit or ductwork serving any existing
area. Schedule relocations or by-passes as required to alleviate any interruptions of
service.
E. Preparation for Alteration Work:
1. Cut, move or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work.
Replace and restore at completion.
2. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded metals
and deteriorated concrete and masonry. Replace materials as specified for finished Work.
3. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces.
4. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes as required for proper installation of new
Work and finishes.
5. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage items from
weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to
prevent condensation.
F. Performance of Cutting and Patching:
1. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without
prior approval.
6-017000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
2. Use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, rather than hammering
and chopping. When cutting through asphaltic concrete, concrete or masonry, use cutting
machine to provide a neat hole. Cut holes neatly to size required with minimum
disturbance of adjacent Work. To avoid marring of existing finished surfaces, cut or drill
from exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when
not in use.
3. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
4. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal
voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07840, to full thickness of the
penetrated element.
5. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest
intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
6. Fit products together to integrate with other Work.
7. Uncover Work to install poorly scheduled Work.
8. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming Work.
9. Remove samples of installed Work for testing when requested.
10. Provide openings in Work for penetration of mechanical and electrical Work.
11. By-pass utility services, such as pipe and conduit, before cutting where such utilities are
shown or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. After by-pass and cutting; cap,
valve or plug and seal tight remaining portion of pipe/conduit to prevent entrance of
moisture or foreign matter.
12. Patch with seams which are durable and as unnoticeable as possible. Comply with
specified tolerances for Work. Where possible, inspect and test patched area to
demonstrate integrity of seam. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and where
necessary extend finish restoration into adjoining surfaces in manner which will eliminate
evidence of patching and refinishing.
3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly
condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed
or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning
to eliminate dust.
D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose
off-site. Coordinate waste removal with Waste Management Plan.
3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification
sections.
B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate
work area to prevent damage.
C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement
of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is
necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material
manufacturer.
3.09 STARTING SYSTEMS
A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage.
August 21, 2013 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000- 7
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by
the equipment or system manufacturer.
D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's
representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
F. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized
representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system
installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
G. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning
correctly.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION
A. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance,
and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location.
B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other
season within six months.
C. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration
and instruction of owner personnel.
D. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for
additional data becomes apparent during instruction.
3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
3.12 FINAL CLEANING
A. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains
and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft
surfaces.
B. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the
surface and material being cleaned.
C. Clean filters of operating equipment.
D. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
E. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
F. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.
Coordinate with project Waste Management Plan.
3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.
1. Provide copies to Architect.
B. Accompany Owner's Representative and Architect on preliminary inspection to determine items
to be listed for completion or correction in Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion.
C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion.
D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been
inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for
Architect's review.
E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with
requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas.
F. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete.
8- 017000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
G. Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000- 9
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 017419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible.
B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor
planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors.
C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as
economically feasible.
D. Required Recycling: The following may not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration:
1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers.
2. Corrugated cardboard.
3. Wood pallets.
4. Dimensional wood and composite wood products.
5. Concrete.
6. Concrete masonry units.
7. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping,
reinforcing bars, door frames, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel,
stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze.
8. Glass.
9. Gypsum drywall and plaster.
10. Carpet, carpet cushion, carpet tile, and carpet remnants, both new and removed: DuPont
(http://flooring.dupont.com)and Interface (www.interfaceinc.com)conduct reclamation
programs.
11. Paint.
12. Windows, doors, and door hardware.
13. Plumbing fixtures.
14. Mechanical and electrical equipment.
15. Fluorescent lamps (light bulbs).
E. Salvage and Reuse: Refer to drawings for the extent of materials to be salvaged, stored, and
reused.
F. Contractor shall submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports; all landfill disposal, recycling,
salvage, and reuse must be reported regardless of to whom the cost or savings accrues; use
the same units of measure on all reports.
G. Contractor shall develop and follow a Waste Management Plan designed to implement these
requirements.
H. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are:
1. Burning on the project site.
2. Burying on the project site.
3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private.
4. Other illegal dumping or burying.
I. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory
requirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to
legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 013000-Administrative Requirements: Additional.requirements for project meetings,
reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation.
B. Section 015000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Additional requirements related to
trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services.
August 21, 2013 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
C. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Waste prevention requirements related to delivery,
storage, and handling.
D. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Trash/waste prevention procedures
related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like.
B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials,
packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and
demolition operations.
C. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of
exposure.
D. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and
remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others.
E. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture
into a new product for reuse by others.
F. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other
discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include
burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste.
G. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.
H. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site.
I. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by
others.
J. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well
production run-off water.
K. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning
from the first time they become waste.
L. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure.
M. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged.
N. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use.
Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Waste Management Plan: Include the following information:
1. Analysis of the trash and waste projected to be generated during the entire project
construction cycle, including types and quantities.
2. Landfill Options: The name, address, and telephone number of the landfill(s)where
trash/waste will be disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and the projected cost
of disposing of all project trash/waste in the landfill(s).
3. Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials that will be diverted from landfills by reuse,
salvage, or recycling.
4. Meetings: Describe regular meetings to be held to address waste prevention, reduction,
recycling, salvage, reuse, and disposal.
5. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be diverted
from landfills will be protected from contamination and prepared for acceptance by
designated facilities; include separation procedures for recyclables, storage, and
packaging.
2 - 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
6. Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of materials to be
recycled; i.e. whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated
centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler.
C. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and
waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report.
1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment
2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner.
3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information:
a. Identification of material.
b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in
landfills.
c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total
disposal cost.
d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and
cost.
4. Incinerator Disposal: Include the following information:
a. Identification of material.
b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project delivered to
incinerators.
c. State the identity of incinerators, total amount of fees paid to incinerator, and total
disposal cost.
d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and
cost.
5. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each:
a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other
projects.
b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, date removed from the project site, and receiving
party.
c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or
savings of salvage or recycling each material.
d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and
cost.
e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by
incineration.
6. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each:
a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project.
b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards.
c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity.
7. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as
appropriate to disposal method.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. See Section 016000- Product Requirements for substitution submission procedures.
B. For each proposed product substitution, submit the following information in addition to
requirements specified in Section 016000:
1. Relative amount of waste produced, compared to specified product.
2. Proposed disposal method for waste product.
3. Markets for recycled waste product.
August 21, 2013 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419-3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES
A. See Section 013000 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal
procedures, and project documentation.
B. See Section 015000 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal
facilities and services.
C. See Section 016000 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and
handling.
D. See Section 017000 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to cutting and patching,
installation, protection, and cleaning.
3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and
overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan.
B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each
subcontractor, Owner, and Architect.
C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling,
salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the
project.
D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings.
1. Pre-bid meeting.
2. Pre-construction meeting.
3. Regular job-site meetings.
E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling,
salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers.
1. Provide containers as required.
2. Provide temporary enclosures around piles of separated materials to be recycled or
salvaged.
3. Provide materials for barriers and enclosures that are nonhazardous, recyclable, or
reusable to the maximum extent possible; reuse project construction waste materials if
possible.
4. Locate enclosures out of the way of construction traffic.
5. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors.
6. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to
avoid contamination of materials.
F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable
regulations.
G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products
in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified
materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to
prevent contamination of recyclable materials.
END OF SECTION
4- 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 017800
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Project Record Documents.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data.
C. Warranties and bonds.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product
data, and samples.
B. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.
C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.
D. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for
Payment. Submit in high resolution digital PDF format on Compact Disc(2 copies)
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before
start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.
2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and
operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance.
3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will
be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content
of all document sets as required prior to final submission.
4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final
inspection. Final documents shall also be submitted in digital PDF Format on Compact
Disc; 2 copies.
C. Warranties and Bonds:
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with
Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.
2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final
Application for Payment.
3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial
Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the
beginning of the warranty period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS- NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:
1. Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
August 21, 2013 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 017800 - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products
installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction
including:
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original Contract drawings.
3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Coordinate preparation of Operation and Maintenance Data with Owner's independent
Homeowner's Association Maintenance Manual contractor.
B. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors
and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
C. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and
data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.
D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and
systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as
maintenance drawings.
E. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions
for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:
1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations.
2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.
B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents
and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and
recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
C. Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicable
reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide
recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.
D. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.
E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for
insertion of data.
3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. The following shall be considered minimum requirements. If the requirements within individual
sections exceed the requirements listed below, the more excessive requirement shall govern.
B. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:
1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.
2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.
4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.
2 - 017800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
C. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and
communications; typed.
D. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed.
E. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and
sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions.
Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
F. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative
maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and
alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.
G. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
H. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
I. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
J. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams
required for maintenance.
K. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.
L. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed.
M. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and
control diagrams.
N. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities
to be maintained in storage.
O. Include test and balancing reports.
P. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of
described products.
B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic
covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related
consistent groupings.
D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.
E. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product
and major component parts of equipment.
F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper.
G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to
size of text pages.
H. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this
Project Manual.
I. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system
description identified, in three parts as follows:
1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect,
Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by
specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:
a. Significant design criteria.
b. List of equipment.
August 21, 2013 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 017800 - 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
c. Parts list for each component.
d. Operating instructions.
e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning
methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
a. Shop drawings and product data.
b. Air and water balance reports.
c. Certificates.
d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
J. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for
insertion of data.
K. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Architect, Consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products
and systems, indexed to content of the volume.
3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers,
and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for
items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the
Date of Substantial completion is determined.
B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
C. Co-execute submittals when required.
D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable
plastic covers.
F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of
Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name
of responsible company principal.
G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project
Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which
specified, and the name of product or work item.
H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing.
Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor,
supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.
END OF SECTION
4-017800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 024100
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Non-structural and structural demolition for remodeling.
2. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures.
3. Removal designated partitions and components.
4. Removal of designated finishes and furnishings
5. Removal of miscellaneous cables, supports and other abandoned building components.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 00700-Summary.
2. Section 01300-Administrative Requirements - Cutting and Patching.
3. Section 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls.
4. Section 01732-Waste Management
5. Section 01780- Project Closeout.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Meet requirements of applicable provisions and
recommendations of:
1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
3. "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" by Associated General Contractors of
America (AGC).
4. Basic Safety Code, State of Oregon, Part IV Demolition.
5. Department of Environmental Quality(DEQ).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit following under provisions of Section 01300:
1. Permits and notices authorizing selective demolition work.
2. Permit for transport and disposal of debris.
3. Demolition procedures and operational sequence for review by Architect.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor Qualifications: Minimum three years experience in demolition of comparable
structures.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Conditions: Verify existing conditions at the site, prior to commencement of work,
notify Architect of discrepancies
B. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent building areas. Maintain protected
egress and access at all times.
C. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without two business days written
notice to Owner and approval of governing authorities.
D. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers, fences, guardrails, enclosures, chutes, shoring
and security devices to protect personnel, public and structures and utilities remaining.
E. Coordinate demolition work scheduling with Tenants Representative.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials necessary to proper completion of demolition work shall be as selected by Contractor,
subject to Architect's review.
August 21, 2013 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024100- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. Refer to respective Specifications Sections for replacement materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DEMOLITION
A. Refer to notes on Drawings for extent of demolition work. While the drawings indicate specific
references of items to be removed, reused or relocated, verify these items with the Architect.
B. Remove all miscellaneous abandoned/unused construction components including abandoned
cables, conduit, mechanical/electrical equipment supports, partition supports etc. as required.
Removal is to be back to the"source" or building core.
C. Remove all electrical, telephone, thermostats and all associated fixtures on all walls, columns,
above ceilings and on floor slabs. Reuse and recycle whenever practical.
D. Mechanical contractor to"Safe Off and Mark"equipment, ductwork, piping etc. to be removed.
Demolition may be provided by licensed demolition contractor.
E. Electrical contractor to"Safe Off and Mark"equipment, cables, conduit,junction boxes etc. to
be removed. Demolition may be provided by licensed demolition contractor.
F. All building components scheduled for reuse shall be disconnected, dismantled and properly
identified and stored for reuse by craftsmen or technicians normally engaged in such work.
G. Qualified plumber's shall disconnect and make safe all plumbing lines, fixtures, etc. scheduled
for reuse.
H. Qualified sheet metal personnel shall remove and store for reuse all grilles, slots, etc. scheduled
for reuse, and disconnect and cap off all ductwork scheduled to remain discontinuous, or to be
modified for reuse.
I. Qualified electricians shall perform all disconnects and shall otherwise"Safe Off' all energized
devices scheduled to be removed during demolition. All components of items or devices
scheduled for demolition shall be removed back to point of origin. No abandoned items (i.e.:
pipe, ductwork, conduit etc.)shall be left in place. Demolition of all items,devices and
components not scheduled for reuse shall be removed by the party deemed best suited for said
demolition.
3.02 DISPOSAL
A. Coordinate disposal with Waste Management Plan - Refer to Section 01732
B. Remove demolition debris daily, as soon as practicable as it accumulates.
C. Do not store or sell materials on site.
D. Remove and transport demolition debris to acceptable, licensed landfill area as soon as
practicable.
3.03 SALVAGE
A. Carefully remove items scheduled to be salvaged for later use by tenant and place in
designated storage area.
3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANUP
A. Leave site in clean condition ready for start of new construction.
END OF SECTION
2 - 024100 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 031000
CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.
B. Openings for other work.
C. Form accessories.
D. Form stripping.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 032000 - Concrete Reinforcement.
B. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 -Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 2010
B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International; 2008
C. ACI 347R- Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2004
D. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology
(Department of Commerce); 2009
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code
requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 347R, ACI 301, and ACI 318.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for design, fabrication, erection and removal of formwork.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD FORM MATERIALS
A. Form Materials: At the discretion of the Contractor within the restrictions of the section.
B. Softwood Plywood: PS 1, C Plugged Grade, Group 2.
C. Specialty Panels for Architectural Grade Concrete Surfaces: HDO, A-A, G-1, Ext. APA, 000,
PS1-83, 3/4"thick.
D. Softwood Plywood: APA, Plyform, B-B,Class I, Exterior, 000, PS-1-83.
E. Plywood: Douglas Fir species; solid one side grade; sound undamaged sheets with clean, true
edges.
2.02 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: Snap-off type, galvanized metal, adjustable length, cone type, with waterproofing
washer, 1 1/2 inch back break dimension,free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1
inch in concrete surface.
B. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil that will not stain concrete, absorb moisture, or
affect color characteristics of concrete finish coatings.
C. Corners: Filleted, wood strip type; 1 1/2 x 1 1/2 inch size; maximum possible lengths.
August 21, 2013 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES 031000- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
D. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength
and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
E. Foam joint gasketing material to seal butt and overlap joints at all form splices (For Architectural
Concrete Work Only).
F. Waterstops: Preformed mineral colloid strips, 3/8 inch thick, moisture expanding.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree
with drawings.
3.02 EARTH FORMS
A. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete.
3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORK
A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with
requirements of ACI 301.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to
overstressing by construction loads.
C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete
during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on
drawings.
F. Provide fillet and chamfer strips on external corners of columns and walls.
G. Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect forms from
moisture or crushing.
H. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to
formwork.
I. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over
reinforcement, request instructions from Architect before proceeding.
3.04 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied
coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water.
Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.
3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete
work.
B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.
C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses,
sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.
D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level,
and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
E. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are continuous
without displacing reinforcement.
2 - 031000 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
F. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and
inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.
G. Temporary openings not allowed at architectural concrete surfaces unless located below grade
line.
H. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly
fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
3.06 FORM CLEANING
A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.
B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that
water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts.
Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed
within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.
3.07 FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301.
B. Construct and align formwork for elevator hoistway in accordance with ASME A17.1 or per
structural drawings.
C. Camber slabs and beams 1/4 inch per 10 feet.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section
01400.
3.09 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own
weight and imposed loads.
B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete
surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
C. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard
damaged forms. Coordinate with Waste Management Plan
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES 031000 -3
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 032000
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete.
B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03100 - Concrete Forms and Accessories.
B. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
C. Section 04220 - Concrete Masonry Units: reinforcement for grouted CMU.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 2010
B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Reinforced Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International; 2008
C. ACI SP-66-ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute International; 2004
D. ASTM A 82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007
E. ASTM A 184/A 184M - Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for
Concrete Reinforcement; 1996.
F. ASTM A 184/A 184M - Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2006
G. ASTM A 496 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed,for Concrete Reinforcement;
1994.
H. ASTM A 496- Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement;
2007
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of
bent bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices.
1. Prepare shop drawings under seal of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in
design of work of this type and licensed in Oregon.
2. Provide complete elevations/sections of all concrete beams, columns, walls, sections to
clearly show reinforcement and reinforcement transitions etc.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that reinforcing steel and accessories supplied for this project
meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. Reports: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with CRSI (DA4), ACI 301, ACI 318, and ASTM A
184/A 184M.
B. Welders' Certificates: Submit certifications for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS
qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.06 ADDITIONAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Reinforcing steel is to be manufactured within 500 miles of the project site
August 21, 2013 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 032000- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420).
1. Plain billet-steel bars.
B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed low-alloy steel bars.
1. Unfinished.
C. Reinforcement Accessories:
1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage.
2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of
reinforcement during concrete placement.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4)- Manual of Standard Practice
and ACI 318.
B. Welding of reinforcement is not permitted unless noted on drawings.
C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress.
PART 3 EXECUTION '
3.01 PLACEMENT
A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required
position.
B. Provide protective bearing plates where chairs are located at slabs with vapor retarders. If
bearing plates are not utilized over vapor retarders, brick supports must be used in lieu of metal
chairs.
C. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.
D. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
E. Refer to general structural notes for minimum concrete cover requirements.
F. Conform to ACI 318 for concrete cover over reinforcement.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01400, will inspect installed
reinforcement for conformance to contract documents before concrete placement.
END OF SECTION
2 - 032000 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete
materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork
B. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended
hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica
fume.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of
materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments:
1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
2. Include substantiating substantial test data to show compliance with ACI 318.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items
complies with requirements:
1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment:
1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete
Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding
Code--Reinforcing Steel."
D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated:
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II:
1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
B. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.
August 21, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
C. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded:
1. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (except at Slabs on Grade can be 1-1/2"
max..)
2. Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not more than 18
percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that less than 8
percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 (0.3-mm)sieve, and less than 8
percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50 (0.3 mm).
D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.
2.02 ADMIXTURES
A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent
water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other
admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.
B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
C. Water-Reducing Admixture:ASTM C 494, Type A.
D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture:ASTM C 494, Type F.
E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture:ASTM C 494, Type E.
F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
2.03 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, multi-ply, polyolefin sheet; 15 mils thick; less than .01
perms per ASTM F-1249; Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier.
B. Accessories: Stego Tape and Stego Mastic
2.04 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1,
Class A, 30% solids content minimum.
F. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound:
a. Klear-Kote Cure-Sealer-Hardener, 30 percent solids; Burke Group, LLC (The).
b. Press and Seal WB-30 Plus; L&M Construction Chemicals Inc.
c. Vocomp-30; W. R. Meadows, Inc.
d. Masterkure 200; Master Builders.
e. Super Aqua Cure; Euclid Chemical Company.
f. Safe Cure and Seal; Dayton Superior Corporation.
2.05 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
B. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A
hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
D. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements, and as follows:
1. Type II, non-load bearing, for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.
2 - 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
2. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
3. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened
concrete.
2.06 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)and that can be feathered at edges to match
adjacent floor elevations:
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm)or coarse sand as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according
to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
B. Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can
be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6 mm):
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by topping manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi (39 MPa) at 28 days when tested according
to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
2.07 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory
trial mix or field test data bases, as follows:
1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.
B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs
for the laboratory trial mix basis.
C. Proportion Concrete mix as follows:
1. Compressive Strength: Refer to General Structural Notes.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: Refer to General Structural Notes.
3. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in
concrete at point of placement having the air content specified in the General Structural
Notes.
D. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement in concrete as follows:
1. Fly Ash: 15 percent.
E. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in
concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs
and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
August 21, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
2.08 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94,
and furnish batch ticket information:
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and
ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information:
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install per drawings
C. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints
where indicated:
1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete
bonding to one side of joint.
3.02 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless
approved by Architect:
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mix.
C. Adjust mix as required to maintain specified air content at the point of discharge.
D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed
on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section
cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to
avoid segregation.
E. Deposit concrete in forms in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer
while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints:
1. Maximum drop height of concrete in forms shall be 5'-0".
2. Concrete pours wider than 4'-0" shall be deposited in horizontal layers no deeper than 24
inches (600mm).
3. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and
procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R.
4. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the
vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm)
into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun
to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to
consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded
items without causing mix constituents to segregate.
F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete:
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
4 - 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on
the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
G. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures:
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C),
uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C)
at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
H. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as
follows, when hot-weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32
deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control
temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water.
Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed
ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.03 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding
ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) in height:
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or
covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing,
veneer plaster, or painting.
2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished concrete:
1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform
color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing
process.
2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick
paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and
one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white
portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens,
rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland
cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white
portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion,
finish surface with a cork float.
August 21, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 5
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across
adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.04 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and
bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes:
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping
or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other
bonded cementitious floor finishes.
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture:
1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and
slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or
membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by
hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings:
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view
or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage
membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system
2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 72 hours according to
ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface:
a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F)25; and levelness, F(L)20; with minimum
local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness, F(L) 15.
b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L)25; with minimum
local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.
c. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F)30; and levelness, F(L)20; with minimum
local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs.
d. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F)45; and levelness, F(L) 35; with minimum
local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L)24.
3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled freestanding 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge, resting on two high spots and
placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following:
a. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
b. 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).
c. 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish:Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to
surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either
thickset or thin-set method. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still
plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
F. Medium Broom Finish: Apply a medium broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and
pedestrain ramps, and elsewhere as indicated:
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with
Architect before application.
6 - 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
G. Heavy Broom Finish: Apply a heavy broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and
pedestrain ramps, parking garage stalls, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, roughen surface by heavy brooming with fiber-bristle
broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
H. Medium Comb Finish: Apply a medium finish to parking garage drive aisles, and elsewhere as
indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, roughen surface by medium combing with steel tyned
rake perpendicular to main traffic route.
I. Heavy Comb Finish:Apply a heavy finish to parking garage ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, roughen surface by heavy combing with steel tyned rake
perpendicular to main traffic route.
3.05 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after
work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with
in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green
and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
3.06 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in
ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions are present. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after
placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a
combination of the methods specified in Paragraph D below.
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a
combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least
12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than
seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape:
a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
floor coverings.
b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments.
c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor
coverings.
2. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity
of coating and repair damage during curing period.
August 21, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 7
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3.07 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep
in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.08 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16(1.2-mm) sieve, using only enough water for
handling and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning:
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in
depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water,
and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar
before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs
secured in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color.
Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before
proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than
surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template:
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm)wide or
that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges
to match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm)to match adjacent floor
elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm)or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with
clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm)
8- 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply
bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete
except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent
finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt,
and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample
materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to
requirements specified in this Article.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling
and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article.
C. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each
additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof:
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for
each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected
batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not
less than one test for each days pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when
concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173,
volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
(4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each
composite sample.
5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for
each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mix.
6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of
four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample:
a. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite
sample.
7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one laboratory-cured specimen at 7 days,
two at 28 days, and hold one for later testing.
D. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured
cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting
and curing in-place concrete.
E. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive
compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no
August 21, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 9
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi
(3.4 MPa).
F. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, concrete manufacturer,
and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing
and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28
days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, type of break for
both 7-and 28-day tests, and air content
G. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
H. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when
test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements
have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests
to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other
methods as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
10 - 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 033511
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface treatment with sealer.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Prepared concrete floors ready to receive finish.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on concrete hardener, sealer, and slip resistant treatment, including
information on compatibility of different products and limitations.
C. Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance renewal of applied coatings.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not finish floors until interior heating system is operational.
B. Maintain ambient temperature of 50 degrees F minimum.
C. Provide ventilation sufficient to prevent injurious gases from temporary heat or other sources
affecting concrete.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COMPOUNDS - HARDENERS AND SEALERS
A. Sealer: Water-borne type.
1. Product: Acri-Soy manufactured by EcoSafety Products.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section.
B. Test existing floor surfaces for existing sealers.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. If there is an existing sealers and it requires replacement, follow manufacturer's
recommendation for surface prep prior to application of new sealer.
3.03 FLOOR SURFACE TREATMENT
A. Apply sealer to scheduled floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
August21, 2013 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 033511 - 1
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 033713
SHOTCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pneumatically applied concrete.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 312316- Excavation: Forming earth to achieve contours and surfaces required.
B. Section 033000-Cast-in-Place Concrete: Reinforcement.
C. Section 079005-Joint Sealers.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 506.2 - Specification for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete; American
Concrete Institute International; 1995.
B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2012.
C. ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete; 2007.
D. ASTM A497/A497M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed,
for Concrete; 2007.
E. ASTM A884/A884M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Fabric for Reinforcement; 2012.
F. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 201 la.
G. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.
H. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a.
I. ASTM C330 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete; 2009.
J. ASTM C332 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Insulating Concrete; 2009.
K. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2012.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Mix design test reports.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 506.2.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A. Sample Panel: Provide mock-up of sufficient size to indicate special treatment or finish
required.
B. Test Panels: Prior to starting work provide mock-up for evaluation of materials and
workmanship:
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain material and surrounding air temperature at minimum 50 degrees F prior to and during
installation and maintain material at this minimum temperature for 7 days after completion of
work. Provide equipment and cover to maintain minimum temperature.
August 21, 2013 SHOTCRETE 033713- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal; white color.
B. Aggregate: Normal weight, ASTM C33, 3/8 inch maximum size.
C. Admixtures: Chemical type conforming to ASTM C494/C494M (wet mix only).
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: Conforming to ASTM C260 (wet mix only).
E. Reinforcing Bars: as specified in Section 03 3000
F. Water: Clean, potable, and not detrimental to shotcrete.
G. Curing Compound: Water-based, spray-on, penetrating curing compound and hardener; not
detrimental to application of subsequent surface finish materials; containing no wax, resin, or
solvents.
H. Bonding Agent: Compatible with substrate and subsequent materials.
I. Alignment Wire: Small gage, high strength steel wire.
2.02 SHOTCRETE MIX
A. Provide wet or dry mix design that gives good compaction and low percentage of rebound, is
stiff enough not to sag.
B. Conform to following requirements:
1. Compressive Strength (28 day minimum): 4,000 psi.
2. Aggregate Size (maximum): 3/8 inch.
3. Air Entrainment:ASTM C260
4. Chemical Admixture: ASTM C494
5. Slump (plus or minus 1/2 inch): 4-5 inch.
C. Maintain quality control records during production of shotcrete; make records available.
2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Mixing Equipment: Capable of thoroughly mixing aggregate, cement, and water in sufficient
quantity to maintain continuous placement.
B. Water Supply: Uniform water pressure at discharge nozzle sufficiently greater than operating
air pressure to ensure intimate mixing with aggregate-cement mix; provide water pump to
system if line water pressure is inadequate.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Independent testing agency will test mock-up panels
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
C. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.
D. Verify fabricated forms are:
1. True to line and dimension.
2. Adequately braced against vibration during placement.
3. Constructed to permit escape of trapped air during gunning operations.
4. Constructed to minimize rebound during gunning operations.
E. Verify correct placement of reinforcement with sufficient clearances to permit complete
encasement.
F. Verify that embedded fittings, pipe, conduits, and other items are correctly and securely placed.
2 -033713 SHOTCRETE August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
G. Ensure easy access to shotcrete surfaces for screeding and finishing, and to permit
uninterrupted application.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove existing unsound concrete from substrate surfaces.
1. Minimize abrupt changes in depth of area to be repaired.
2. Remove square external corners from substrate by radiusing the edges.
B. Sandblast surfaces to receive shotcrete.
C. Determine operating procedures for placement in close quarters, extended distances, or around
unusual obstructions where placement velocities and mix consistency may be adjusted during
application.
D. Clean and wet cementitious or absorptive substrate surfaces prior to receiving shotcrete. Keep
porous surfaces damp for several hours prior to placement of shotcrete.
3.03 ALIGNMENT CONTROL
A. Provide alignment wire to establish thickness and plane of required surfaces.
B. Install alignment wire at corners and offsets not established by forms.
C. Tighten alignment wire true to line. Position adjustment devices to permit additional tightening.
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 506.2.
B. Use mixing and delivery equipment capable of thoroughly mixing aggregate, cement, and water
in sufficient quantity to maintain continuous and uniform placement.
C. Do not apply shotcrete more than 45 minutes after adding Portland cement to the mix.
D. Do not place shotcrete on surfaces that are frozen, spongy, or where there is free water.
E. Achieve maximum compaction with minimum rebound.
F. Build-up to required thickness in multiple passes to achieve layering. Encase reinforcement
with the first pass.
G. Allow each layer to take initial set before applying succeeding layers.
H. Do not permit applied shotcrete to sag, slough, or displace.
I. After initial set of final layer, remove excess material outside of forms and alignment lines.
J. Sandblast to remove laitance. Clean with air/water pressure jet.
K. Finish surface of final layer with natural gun finish.
L. Remove rebound at construction and expansion joints.
M. Remove rebound material that does not fall clear of work; discard salvaged rebound.
N. Maintain shotcrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period
necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of shotcrete.
O. Immediately after placement, protect shotcrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical injury.
P. Sound test the applied material with hammer for voids. Expose voids and replace with new
shotcrete ensuring full bond with adjacent work.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide additional test panels, as specified for mock-up, during the course of the work as may
be requested by the testing agency.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit applied work to damage adjacent surfaces.
August 21, 2013 SHOTCRETE 033713- 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3.07 SCHEDULES
END OF SECTION
4 - 033713 SHOTCRETE August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 040511
MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Mortar for masonry.
B. Grout for masonry.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 042200 - Concrete Masonry Units
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA- Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures
and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International; 2011.
B. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.
C. ASTM C144 -Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2011.
D. ASTM C270 -Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2012.
E. ASTM C476 -Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010.
F. ASTM C780- Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars
for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2012.
G. ASTM C1072 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength;
2012.
H. ASTM C1142 - Standard Specification for Extended Life Mortar for Unit Masonry; 1995
(Reapproved 2007).
I. ASTM C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms; 2012.
J. ASTM E518 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Include design mix and indicate whether the Proportion or Property specification
of ASTM C270 is to be used. Also include required environmental conditions and admixture
limitations.
C. Reports: Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials to
requirements of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation reports to requirements of ASTM C 1019.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the
contract documents.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign
matter.
B. Coordinate disposal of packing materials with Project Waste Management Plan
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold Weather Requirements: Comply with recommendations of IMIAWC (CW).
B. Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with IMIAWC (HW).
August 21, 2013 MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING 040511 - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MORTAR AND GROUT APPLICATIONS
A. Mortar Mix Designs: ASTM C270, Property Specification.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type N.
B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144.
C. Water: Clean and potable.
D. Moisture-Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity.
E. Bonding Agent: Latex type.
2.03 MORTAR MIXES
A. Ready Mixed Mortar: ASTM C 1142, Type RS.
B. Minimum compressive strength 1,800 psi at 28 days.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry:ASTM C 270, Property Specification:
1. Engineered masonry: Type S.
2. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type S.
3. Pointing mortar: Type N with maximum 2 percent ammonium stearate or calcium stearate
per cement weight.
2.04 MORTAR MIXING
A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM
C270 and in quantities needed for immediate use.
B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.
C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.
D. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing.
E. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or two-and-one-half
hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F.
2.05 GROUT MIXES
A. Engineered Masonry: 2000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; provide premixed type in
accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M:
1. Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less.
2. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches.
2.06 GROUT MIXING
A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M.
B. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with
ASTM C476 for fine grout.
C. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
D. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces.
B. Plug clean-out holes for grouted masonry with brick masonry units. Brace masonry to resist wet
grout pressure.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of section(s) in which masonry is specified.
2 - 040511 MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids.
C. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches without consolidating grout by rodding.
D. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout.
E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces.
3.03 GROUTING
A. Grout solid all cells.
B. Low-Lift Grouting:
1. Limit height of pours to 12 inches.
2. Limit height of masonry to 16 inches above each pour.
3. Pour grout only after vertical reinforcing is in place; place horizontal reinforcing as grout is
poured. Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured.
4. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt
pours for more than 1-1/2 hours.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field tests, in accordance with provisions of Section
014000.
B. Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C780 procedures.
C. Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C1019 procedures.
D. Prism Tests: Test masonry and mortar panels for compressive strength in accordance with
ASTM C1314, and for flexural bond strength in accordance with ASTM C1072 or ASTM E518;
perform tests and evaluate results as specified in individual masonry sections.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING 040511 - 3
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 042200
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete unit masonry.
B. Steel Reinforcement and Accessories.
C. Architectural units:
1. Split face unit masonry.
2. Standard 8x8x16 Units (Match Existing)
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04065 - Mortar and Masonry Grout
B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: deflection heads
C. Section 092200- Portland Cement Plaster.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 123/A 123M -Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products; 2012
B. ASTM C 90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 1998.
C. ASTM D 1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-- Sponge or Expanded
Rubber; 2007
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013000.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data for each type of masonry unit, accessory, and other
manufactured products.
C. Compliance: Certifications that each type complies with specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Where fire resistance ratings are indicated, provide materials
and construction that are identical to those assemblies and of equivalent thickness, whose fire
endurance has been determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 119 or by other
methods acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition.
B. Store and handle materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture,
temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, or other causes.
C. Limit moisture absorption of concrete masonry units during delivery and until installation to the
maximum percentage specified for Type I units for the average annual relative humidity as
reported by the U.S.Weather Bureau Station nearest project site.
D. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent deterioration by corrosion and
accumulation of dirt.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Do not lay masonry units that are wet or frozen.
2. Remove ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is
dry to the touch.
3. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions.
August 21, 2013 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 042200- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Concrete Masonry Units: Mutual Materials Co., 18230 Boones Ferry Rd., Durham, Oregon
97224, Tel; 503-624-886;
2. Westblock Pacific, 1740 Lombard Place, PO Box 11207, Portland, Oregon 97211, Tel:
503-285 4557, Fax: 503-285-9179.
3. Willamette Graystone Inc., 3700 Franklin Blvd., Eugene, Oregon 97403, Tel:
541-726--7666, Fax: 541-747-122;
4. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section
01600.
2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Comply with referenced standards and other requirements indicated below applicable to each
form of concrete masonry unit required.
B. Provide special shapes where required for lintels,jambs, corners, sash, control joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
C. Provide units complying with characteristics indicated below for Grade, Type, Face Size,
Exposed Face, and under each form of block included for weight classification:
1. Grade N
2. Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 inches long by 8
inches high, 15-5/8 inches by 7-5/8 inches actual, by thicknesses indicated.
D. Moisture Resistant Admixture: BASF "Control Block"
2.03 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Split Face Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Manufacturer: Clayton Block Co., Inc., 515 Route 528, Lakewood, NJ 08701; Tel: (800)
662-3044.
2. ASTM C 90, Type I.
a. Weight Classification: Normal weight.
3. Sizes: Manufacturer's standard nominal sizes.
4. Colors: Selected from Clayton Architectural Split Face Block Series.
5. Integral water-repellant; sound and free of cracks or other defects that would interfere with
the proper placing of the units or impair the strength or performance of the construction.
6. Cleaner: Detergent cleaner followed by rinsing surfaces with clean water.
a. Do not use acid or acid-based solutions.
2.04 JOINT REINFORCEMENT, TIES,AND ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Dur-O-WaI, Inc.
2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
B. General: Comply with requirements indicated below for basic materials, as well as requirements
for each form of joint reinforcement, tie, and anchor for size and other characteristics.
C. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Wire: Uncoated wire per ASTM A 82, with zinc coating applied after
prefabrication into units per ASTM A 123/A 123M, 1.5 oz. per sq. ft. of wire surface.
D. Joint Reinforcement: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and
plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee
units:
1. Width: Approximately 2 inches less than nominal width of walls and partitions, providing
mortar cover of not less than 5/8 inch on joint faces exposed to exterior and 1/2 inch
elsewhere.
2. Wire Size, Side Rods: 9 gage.
2 - 042200 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3. Wire Size, Cross Rods: 9 gage.
4. Single-Wythe Configuration: Truss design, continuous diagonal cross rods spaced not
more than 16 inches on center.
E. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No. 18.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Non-Metallic Expansion Joint Strips: Premolded, flexible cellular neoprene rubber filler strips,
complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade RE41E1, capable of compression up to 35 percent; width
and thickness indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and/or mortar splatter by means of coverings
spread on ground and over wall surfaces.
B. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Mortar: When ambient temperatures drop below 40 degrees F, heat mortar materials while
masonry work is progressing, maintain mixing temperature selected within 10 degrees F.
Comply with the following procedures based upon the following ambient air temperature ranges
at the time of installation.
1. 40 Degrees to 32 Degrees F:
a. Heat mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40 degrees and 120
degrees F.
2. 32 Degrees to 25 Degrees F:
a. Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperature between 40 degrees and
120 degrees F.
b. Maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing.
3. 25 Degrees to 20 Degrees F:
a. Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperature between 40 degrees and
120 degrees F.
b. Maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing.
c. Heat both sides of walls under construction using salamanders or other heat sources.
d. Use windbreaks or enclosures when wind exceeds 15 mph.
4. 20 Degrees F and Below:
a. Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperature between 40 degrees and
120 degrees F; do not heat mixing water to above 160 degrees F.
b. Heat masonry units to above 20 degrees F at time of laying.
c. Provide enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain an air temperature of at least 40
degrees F for 24 hours after laying units.
B. Grout: When night temperatures are expected to drop below 40 degrees F, heat grout
materials while masonry work is progressing, maintaining mixing temperature selected within 10
degrees F. Comply with the following procedures based upon the following anticipated
minimum night temperature ranges.
1. 40 Degrees to 32 Degrees F:
a. Heat mixing water to produce grout temperature between 40 degrees and 120
degrees F.
2. 32 Degrees to 25 Degrees F:
a. Heat grout materials to 90 degrees F to produce in-place grout temperature of 70
degrees F at end of work day.
3. 25 Degrees to 20 Degrees F:
a. Heat grout materials to 90 degrees F to produce in-place grout temperature of 70
degrees F at end of work day.
b. Heat both sides of walls under construction using salamanders or other heat sources.
August 21, 2013 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 042200- 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
c. Use windbreaks or enclosures when wind exceeds 15 mph.
4. 20 Degrees F and Below:
a. Heat grout materials to 90 degrees F to produce in-place grout temperature of 70
degrees F at end of work day; do not heat mixing water to above 160 degrees F.
b. Heat masonry units to above 20 degrees F at time of laying.
c. Provide enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain an air temperature of at least 40
degrees F for 24 hours after laying units.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect completed masonry and masonry not being worked on in the following manner.
Temperature ranges below apply to mean daily air temperature except for grouted masonry; for
grouted masonry, temperature ranges below apply to anticipated minimum night temperatures.
3.04 COURSING
A. Concrete Masonry Units: Match Existing
3.05 PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
C. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
D. Interlock intersections and external corners .
E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must
be made, remove mortar and replace.
F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped
edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
G. Cut mortar joints flush at locations to received Portland Cement Plaster finish or resilient base,
H. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or
decks with steel defelction head at fire seal as required.
3.06 LINTELS
A. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings as indicated on structural drawings and
notes.
3.07 GROUTED COMPONENTS
A. Reinforce bond beams as indicated on structural drawings and notes
B. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.
C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of
dimensioned position.
D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
E. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of
opening.
3.08 CONTROL JOINTS
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control joints.
B. Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow
contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit
faces for placement of backer rod and sealant.
C. Size control joint in accordance with section 07900 for sealant performance.
3.09 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Alignment: 1/4"
B. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16"
4-042200 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4" in 10 feet
D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or
more.
E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in aft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft.
F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8" in 3 feet
3.10 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for utility penetrations as required Coordinate with other sections of work to provide
correct size, shape, and location. Fire seal all penetrations in rated walls. Caulk all
penetrations in non-rated walls.
B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or
strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section
01400.
B. Mortar Tests: Test mortar in accordance with ASTM C 780, testing with same frequency as
masonry samples.
3.12 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.
B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 042200- 5
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 051200
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Structural steel framing members, support members and struts.
B. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates.
C. Grouting under base plates.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 052100- Steel Joist Framing.
B. Section 053100 - Steel Decking: Support framing for small openings in deck.
C. Section 055000- Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work.
1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. See Section 012200- Unit Prices, for additional unit price requirements.
B. Structural Steel Framing:
1. Basis of Measurement: By the ton.
2. Basis of Payment: Includes structural members fabricated, placed and anchored.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual;American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2011.
B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of
Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005.
C. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004.
D. ASTM A108- Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2007.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.
2.03 FINISH
A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP.
B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field
welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may
properly proceed.
3.02 ERECTION
A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings
and Bridges".
B. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's
instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45
degrees.
August 21, 2013 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section
014000.
B. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of field-bolted connections in accordance
with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", testing at least
10 percent of bolts at each connection.
C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field-welded connections and test at least 10 percent
of welds as per specified as in structural drawings.
D.
END OF SECTION
2 - 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 051213
ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements regarding the appearance and surface preparation of
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS). Refer to Division 5 Section "Structural Steel"
for all other requirements regarding steel work not included in this section. This section applies
to any members noted on Architectural [and Structural] drawings as AESS [and in the areas
defined as AESS below].
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300-Administrative Requirements for Submittal Requirements.
B. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
C. Product Data for each type of product specified.
D. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of AESS components.
1. Provide erection drawings clearly indicating which members are considered as AESS
members.
2. Include details that clearly identify all of the requirements listed in sections 2.3
"Fabrication" and 3.3 "Erection" of this specification. Provide connections for exposed
AESS consistent with concepts shown on the architectural or structural drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify high-strength bolted slip-critical, direct-tensioned shear/bearing connections.
[Indicate to which direction bolt heads should be oriented].
4. Indicate type, size, finish and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify high-strength bolted slip-critical, direct-tensioned shear/bearing connections.
[Indicate to which direction bolt heads should be oriented.]
5. Clearly indicate which surfaces or edges are exposed and what class of surface
preparation is being used.
6. Indicate special tolerances and erection requirements as noted on the drawings or defined
herein.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: In addition to those qualifications listed in Division 5 Section
"Structural Steel," engage a firm experienced in fabricating AESS similar to that indicated for
this Project with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production
capacity to fabricate AESS without delaying the Work.
B. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice," latest edition, Section 10 as amended herein.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver AESS to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of
installation.
B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged
materials from erosion and deterioration. Use special care in handling to prevent twisting or
warping of AESS members.
C. Erect pre-painted finish pieces using padded slings or other methods such that they are not
damaged. Provide padding as required to protect while rigging and aligning member's frames.
Weld tabs for temporary bracing and safety cabling only at points concealed from view in the
completed structure or where approved by the Architect during the pre-installation meting.
August 21, 2013 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL 051213- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
Methods of removing temporary erection devices and finishing the AESS members shall be
approved by the Architect prior to erection.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where AESS is indicated to fit against walls and other construction, verify
dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop
drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
work.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchors for AESS members that connect to the work of other trades.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchors, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to the project site in time for installation. [Anchorage
concepts shall be as indicated on drawings and approved on final shop drawings.]
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Meet requirements of Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" as amended below.
B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Per Section 05120 heavy hex heads and nuts
[Provide rounded bolt heads with twist-off bolts]. Provide standard carbon steel [Cadmium
plated] [Mechanically galvanized] finish.
2.02 PRIMERS
A. Compatibility: The General Contractor shall submit all components/procedures of the paint
system for AESS as a single coordinated submittal. As a minimum, identify required surface
preparation, primer, intermediate coat(if applicable)and finish coat. All of the items shall be
coordinated with the finish coat specified in Division 9.
B. Primer: Fabricator's standard alkyd red oxide, rust-inhibiting primer.
C. Primer: Fast curing, universal modified alkyd, rust inhibiting shop coat with good resistance to
normal atmospheric corrosion. Primer shall comply with all federal standards for VOC, lead and
chromate levels.
D. Primer: Acrylic water-soluble shop coat with good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion.
Primer shall comply with all federal standards for VOC, lead and chromate levels.
E. Primer: Fast-curing two-part epoxy. Primer shall comply with all federal standards for VOC,
lead and chromate levels.
F. Primer: Organic, epoxy/zinc-rich, meeting class B surface requirements for slip-critical
connections. Primer shall comply with all federal standards for VOC, lead and chromate levels.
G. Primer: Inorganic zinc-rich meeting class B surface requirements for slip-critical connections.
Primer shall comply with all federal standards, for VOC, lead and chromate levels.
H. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc dust-content paint for galvanizing welds and repair-painting
galvanized steel, with dry-film coating not less than 90-percent zinc dust by weight.
2.03 FABRICATIION
A. Fabricate and assemble AESS in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Locate field joints in
AESS assemblies at concealed locations or as approved by the Architect. Detail AESS
assemblies to minimize field handling and expedite erection.
B. Fabricate AES with exposed surfaces smooth, square and of surface quality consistent with the
approved mock-up. Use special care in handling and shipping of AESS both before and after
shop painting.
C. In addition to special care used to handle and fabricate AESS, employ the following fabrication
techniques
2- 051213 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1. Fabrication Tolerance: Fabricate steel to one half the normal tolerance as specified in the
Code of Standard Practice Section 10.
2. Welds ground smooth: Fabricator shall grind welds of AESS smooth. For groove welds,
the weld shall be made flush to the surfaces each side and be within +1/18", -0"of plate
thickness.
3. Contouring and blending of welds: Where fillet welds are indicated to be
ground-contoured, or blended, oversize welds as required and grind to provide a smooth
transition and to match profile on approved mock-up.
4. Continuous Welds: Where welding is noted on the drawings, provide continuous welds of
a uniform size and profile.
5. Minimize Weld Show Through: At locations where welding on the far side of an exposed
connection occurs, grind distortion and marking of the steel to a smooth profile with
adjacent material.
6. Coping and Blocking Tolerance: Maintain a uniform gap of 1/8" + 1/32"at all copes and
blocks.
7. Joint Gap Tolerance: Maintain a uniform gap of 1/8" + 1/32".
8. Piece Marks Hidden: Fabricate such that piece marks are fully hidden in the final structure
or made with such media to permit full removal after erection.
9. Mill Mark Removal: Fabricator shall deliver steel with no mill marks (stenciled, stamped,
raised, etc.) in exposed locations. Mill marks shall be omitted by cutting of mill material to
appropriate lengths where possible. Where not possible, the fabricator can fill and/or grind
to a surface finish consistent with the approved mock-up.
10. Grinding of sheared edges: Fabricator shall grind all edges of sheared, punched or
flame-cut steel to match approved mock-up.
11. Rolled Members: Member specified to be rolled to a final curved shape shall be fully
shaped in the shop and tied during shipping to prevent stress relieving. Distortion of the
web or stem, and of outstanding flanges or legs of angles shall be visibly acceptable to the
Architect from a distance of 20' under any lighting condition determined by the Architect.
Tolerances for the vertical and horizontal walls of rectangular HSS members after rolling
shall be the specified dimension + '/z".
2.04 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. Bolted Connections: Make in accordance with Section 01520. Provide bolt type and finish as
noted herein and align both heads as indicated on the approved shop drawings.
B. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 and Section 05120. Appearance and quality of
welds shall be consistent with mock-up. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that
will maintain alignment of members without warp exceeding the tolerance of this section.
2.05 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop-prime steel surfaces, except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2".
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections, if primer does not meet
the specified AISC slip coefficient.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC Specifications as follows:
1. SSPC-SP 1 "Solvent Cleaning."
2. SSPC-SP 2"Hand Tool Cleaning." (This level of surface preparation will not be adequate
for most paint systems for AESS construction).
3. SSPC-SP3"Power Tool Cleaning." (This level of surface preparation is the minimum for
most AESS projects. It may be acceptable for alkyd primers and acrylic or alkyd finish
coats, particularly in interior applications.)
August 21, 2013 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL 051213- 3
4. SSPC-SP 6"Commercial Blast Cleaning." (This level of surface preparation adds
significantly to the total cost of the steel. It is required for epoxy primers to allow adequate
bonding to the steel. Recommended for locations where a rust inhibitive primer will be
used in an exterior application. It is also required where polyurethane finish coats will be
used over the primer.)
5. Coordinate the required blast profile with the approved paint submittal prior to beginning
surface preparation.
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's
instructions to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038mm). Use priming
methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2. Apply two coats of shop primer to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or
erection.
2.06 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to AESS indicated for
galvanizing according to ASTM A A123. Fabricate such that all connections of assemblies are
made in the field with bolted connections. Provide galvanized finish or members and
assemblies within the range of color and surface textures presented in the mock-ups.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. The erector shall check all AESS members upon delivery for twist, kinks, gouges or other
imperfections which might result in rejection of the appearance of the member. Coordinate
remedial action with fabricator prior to erecting steel.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide connections for temporary shoring, bracing and supports only where noted on the
approved shop drawings. Temporary connections not shown shall be made at locations not
exposed to view in the final stru8cture or as approved by the Architect. Handle, lift and align
pieces using padded slings and/or other protection required to maintain the appearance of the
AESS through the process of erection.
3.03 ERECTION
A. Set AESS accurately in locations and to elevations indicated, and according to AISC
specifications referenced in this Section.
B. In addition to the special care used to handle and erect AESS, employ the following erection
techniques:
1. AESS erection tolerances: Erection tolerances shall meet the requirements of Chapter 10
of the AISC Code of Standard Practice.
2. Welds ground smooth: Erector shall grind welds smooth in the connections of AESS
members. For groove welds, the weld shall be made flush to the surfaces of each side
and be within + 1/16", -0" of plate thickness.
3. Contouring and blending of welds: Where fillet welds are indicated to be ground
contoured, or blended, oversize welds as required; grind to provide a smooth transition
and to match profile on approved mock-up.
4. Continuous welds: Where noted on the drawings, provide continuous welds of a uniform
size and profile.
5. Minimize weld show-through: At locations where welding on the far side of an exposed
connection occurs, grind distortion and marking of the steel to a smooth profile with
adjacent material.
6. Bold head orientation: All bolt heads shall be oriented as indicated on the contract
documents. Where bold-head alignment is specified, the orientation shall be noted for
each connection on the erection drawings. Where not noted, the bolt heads in a given
connection shall be oriented to one side.
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
7. Removal of field connection aids: Run-out tabs, erection bolts and other steel members
added to connections to allow for alignment, fit-up, and welding in the field shall be
removed from the structure. Field groove welds shall be selected to eliminate the need for
backing bars or to permit their removal after welding. Welds at run-out tabs shall be
removed to match adjacent surfaces and ground smooth. Holes for erection bolts shall be
plug welded and ground smooth.
8. Filling of weld access holes: Where holes must be cut in the web at the intersection with
flanges on W shapes and structural tees to permit field welding of the flanges, they shall
be filled. Filling shall be executed with proper procedures to minimize restraint and
address thermal stresses in groups 4 and 5 shapes.
C. Field welding: Weld profile, quality, and finish shall be consistent with mock-ups approved prior
to fabrication.
D. Splice members only where indicated.
E. Obtain permission for any torch cutting or field fabrication from the Architect. Finish sections
thermally cut during erection to a surface appearance consistent with the mock up.
F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that must
be enlarged to admit bolts. Replace connection plates that are misaligned where holes cannot
be aligned with acceptable final appearance.
3.04 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. Bolted Connections: Install bolts of the specified type and finish in accordance with Division 5
section "Structural Steel"for other requirements.
B. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, and appearance. Refer to
Division 5 section "Structural Steel" for other requirements.
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes
without warp. Verify that weld size, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for AESS
will limit distortions to allowable tolerances.
2. Obtain Architect's approval for appearance of welds in repaired or field modified work.
3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touch-up Painting: Cleaning and Touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint shall be completed to blend with the adjacent surfaces of AESS.
Such touch-up work shall be done in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as specified in
Division 9, section "Painting".
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL 051213- 5
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 053100
STEEL DECKING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Roof deck.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 051200 - Structural Steel Framing: Support framing for openings larger than 18 inches
and shear stud connectors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
B. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
C. AWS D1.3-Structural Welding Code- Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 2008.
D. SDI (DM)- Publication No.31, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks;
Steel Deck Institute;2007.
E. SSPC-Paint 20-Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); The Society for
Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement,
pertinent details, and accessories.
C. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and
finishes.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design deck layout, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in Oregon.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL DECK
A. All Deck Types: Select and design metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual.
1. Calculate to structural working stress design and structural properties specified.
B. Roof Deck: Non-composite type, fluted steel sheet:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with
G90/Z275 galvanized coating.
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1.
B. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self tapping.
C. Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated, 3/4 inch outside diameter, 1/8 inch thick.
D. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, complying with VOC limitations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
August 21, 2013 STEEL DECKING 053100- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align
and level.
B. On steel supports provide minimum 1-1/2 inch bearing.
C. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports at 12 inches on
center maximum, parallel with the deck flute and at each transverse flute using methods
specified.
1. Welding: Use fusion welds through weld washers.
D. At welded male/female side laps weld at 18 inches on center maximum.
E. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3.
F. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned
areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer.
END OF SECTION
2 - 053100 STEEL DECKING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Shop fabricated steel items.
B. Structural steel member required for Entry Canopy
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.
B. Section 055213- Pipe and Tube Railings.
C. Section 07611 - Custom Sheet Metal Roofing: Canopy
D. Section 08331 - Overhead Coiling Doors: support for edge guides
E. Section 09960 - High Performance Coatings
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A14.3-American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety Requirements; 2008.
B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
C. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless; 2012.
D. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2012.
E. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
F. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon
Steel Plates; 2012.
G. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60,000
PSI Tensile Strength; 2012.
H. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010.
I. ASTM A325M -Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa
Tensile Strength (Metric); 2009.
J. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a.
K. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing; 2007.
L. ASTM B211 M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or
Cold-Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire (Metric); 2012e1.
M. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012.
N. AWS A2.4- Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;
American Welding Society; 2012.
O. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code-Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
P. SSPC-Paint 15- Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).
Q. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
August 21, 2013 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size
and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details
where applicable.
1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld
lengths.
C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS
qualification within the previous 12 months.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS- STEEL
A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 992.
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.
C. Plates: ASTM A283.
D. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black and hot-dip galvanized finish, as
indicated.
E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM
A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components.
F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.
G. Shop Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
H. Touch up primer at interior application shall not exceed VOC emissions of 150 g/L for non-flat
coatings.
I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: zinc rich type.,
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt
tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS
A. Miscellaneous steel casing profiles for openings in masonry walls.
B. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, half-sphere steel cap; galvanized finish. Field finish with
gloss paint.
C. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For
support of metal decking; prime paint finish.
D. Lintels: As detailed; prime paint finish.
2.04 PREFABRICATED LADDERS
A. Prefabricated Ladder: Welded metal unit complying with ANSI A14.3; factory fabricated to
greatest degree practical and in the largest components possible.
1. Components: Manufacturer's standard rails, rungs, treads, handrails. returns, platforms
and safety devices complying with the requirements of the MATERIALS article of this
section.
2. Materials: Aluminum; ASTM B221/B221M, alloy 6063-T52.
3. Finish: Natural aluminum.
4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2 - 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
2.05 FINISHES - STEEL
A. Prime paint all steel items except as noted under SCHEDULE below.
1. Exceptions: items to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2.
C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
D. Prime Painting: Two coats.
E. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M
requirements. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft galvanized coating.
F. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M
requirements.
2.06 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.
B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.
C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.
D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.
E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into
concrete or embedded in masonry.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
D. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except
surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.
3.05 SCHEDULE
A. When steel components are indicated in weather or moisture exposed locations; components
are to be galvanized unless specifically noted otherwise.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 055213
HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall mounted handrails.
B. Free-standing railings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of anchors in concrete.
B. Section 09960 - High Performance coatings
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2012.
B. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a.
C. ASTM E935-Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems
and Rails for Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006).
D. ASTM E985- Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for
Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006).
E. SSPC-Paint 20 -Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); The Society for
Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of
fasteners, and accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RAILINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent
requirements of ASTM E985 and applicable local code.
B. Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist lateral force of 50 lbs per lineal foot
and a concentrated load of 200 pounds applied in any direction at the top and transfer that load
through the supports to structure. Intermediate railings and panels shall be designed to
minimallt resist lateral loads of 50 pounds per square foot.
C. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to
connections or members.
D. Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights.
1. Minimally, when railings are located more than 30 inches above the adjacent grade, the
top of the railing shall not be less that 42 inches above the adjacent standing surface and
openings between intermediate railings, balusters or other grillage shall be less than 4
inches in at least one direction.
2. Top Rails and Wall Rails: 1-1/2 inches diameter, round.
3. Intermediate Rails: 1-1/2 inches diameter, round.
4. Posts: 1-1/2 inches diameter, round.
E. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same
materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are
unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners.
August 21, 2013 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 055213- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
F. Provide welding fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts
and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice connectors, flanges,
escutcheons, and wall brackets.
2.02 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM
A. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.
B. Welding Fittings: Factory-or shop-welded from matching pipe or tube; seams continuously
welded;joints and seams ground smooth.
C. Mounting flanges: 3/16 steel plate; 3 fasteners per end flange and 2 fasteners per intermediate
flange.
D. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of railing.
E. Galvanizing: In accordance with requirements of ASTM A123/A123M.
1. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to
building structure.
B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site.
C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to
accommodate site assembly and installation.
D. Welded Joints:
1. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic
filler. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not
encourage water intrusion.
2. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic
filler.
3. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints
butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates,
for installation as work of other sections.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight
joints.
C. Anchor railings securely to structure.
D. Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush
countersunk fastenings.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, non-cumulative.
B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
2 - 055213 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Structural dimension lumber framing.
B. Exposed timber structural framing.
C. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings.
D. Preservative treated wood materials.
E. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support angles for
wood framing.
B. Section 08620 - Unit Skylights- remedial framing in new roof openings
C. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AFPA(WFCM) -Wood Frame Construction Manual for One-and Two-Family Dwellings;
American Forest and Paper Association; 2012.
B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2012.
D. AWPA C2- Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties-- Preservative Treatment by Pressure
Processes; American Wood Protection Association; 2003.
E. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood
Protection Association; 2012.
F. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
G. PS 20 -American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology
(Department of Commerce); 2010.
H. WCLIB (GR)- Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber No. 17; West Coast Lumber
Inspection Bureau; 2004, and supplements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or
exceed specified requirements.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent
deformation and to allow air circulation.
1.06 DESIGN STANDARDS
A. Blocking for grab bars, fold down seats and baby changing stations to be designed and
anchored to resist a minimum live point load of 250 pounds.
B. Structural Performance for Interior Partitions
1. Standard Partitions: Design to resist a minimum lateral load of 5 lbs/sf with a maximum
deflection of LJ240.
2. Shaft Wall: Configure and install components as required to achieve the following
performance levels:
August 21, 2013 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
a. Positive Air Pressure Within Shaft: Sustained positive loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with
maximum mid-span deflection of L/240.
b. Negative Air Pressure Within Shaft: Sustained negative loads of 5 lbs/sf with a
maximum deflection of L/240.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.
1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch, unless otherwise indicated.
2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no
grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the
specified requirements.
3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,
American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org)and who provides grading service
for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless
otherwise indicated.
4. Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearance
characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified.
B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
C. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site; see Section 016000 for
requirements for locally-sourced products.
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS
A. Grading Agency: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB).
B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
D. Stud Framing ( 2 by 2 through 2 by 6 ):
1. Grade: No. 2.
E. Joist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing ( 2 by 6 through 4 by 16 ):
1. Machine stress-rated (MSR)as follows:
a. Fb-single (minimum extreme fiber stress in bending): 1350 psi.
b. E (minimum modulus of elasticity): 1,300,000 psi.
2.03 EXPOSED TIMBERS
A. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements, in lieu of
grade stamping.
B. Moisture Content: Kiln-dry(20 percent maximum).
C. Surfacing: S4S.
D. Species: Redwood.
E. Grade: Clear Heart Structural.
2.04 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. Wall Sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C-D, Exposure I.
B. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood,; 3/4 inch thick;
flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors:
1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity
and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
2 -061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. Die-Stamped Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions.
Manufactured by Simpson Strong Tie
C. Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. Manufactured by
Simpson Strong Tie
D. Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from
continuous rolls.
2.06 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System
for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific
applications.
1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an
ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with
AWPA standards.
B. Preservative Treatment:
1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category
UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention.
a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncture gasket
cleanly to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts.
B. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately
after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would
lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.
B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to
maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and
installation of permanent bracing.
C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed.
D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and
spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame
Construction Manual.
E. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that
are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed.
F. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs.
3.04 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY
A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and
roofing assembly installation.
August 21, 2013 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3.05 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm
bearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples.
B. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with
edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into
studs in field of board.
1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly.
2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board
parallel to studs.
3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.
B. Variation from Plane: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 017419.
1. Comply with applicable regulations.
2. Do not burn scrap on project site.
3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.
4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation
facilities or"waste-to-energy"facilities.
B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.
C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.
D. Coordinate disposal of wood waste with Waste Management Plan
END OF SECTION
4- 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 061800
GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glue laminated wood beams and purlins.
B. Preservative treatment of wood.
C. Fire retardant treatment of wood.
D. Steel hardware and attachment brackets.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 016116 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Field Finishing.
1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. See Section 012200- Unit Prices, for additional unit price requirements.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AITC 117- Standard Specifications for Structural Glued Laminated Timber of Softwood
Species; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2010.
B. AITC A190.1 -American National Standard for Wood Products - Structural Glued Laminated
Timber; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2007.
C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
D. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2012.
E. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
F. ASTM A325- Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010.
G. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa
Tensile Strength (Metric); 2013.
H. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a.
I. ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]; 2007.
J. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
K. ASTM D2559-Standard Specification for Adhesives for Bonded Structural Wood Products for
Use Under Exterior Exposure Conditions; 2012a.
L. ASTM D2898-Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated
Wood for Fire Testing; 2010.
M. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2012.
N. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American
Wood-Preservers'Association; 2012.
O. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code- Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
P. FM P7825-Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.
Q. ITS (DIR)- Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.
R. RIS (GR)- Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber; Redwood
Inspection Service; 2000.
August 21, 2013 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
S. SPIB (GR)- Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2002.
T. UL (FRD)- Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
U. WCLIB (GR)-Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber No. 17; West Coast Lumber
Inspection Bureau; 2004, and supplements.
V. WWPA G-5-Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2011.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural members under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in Oregon.
B. Manufacturer/Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of glue laminated
structural units with three years of documented experience, and certified by AITC in accordance
with AITC A190.1.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect members to AITC requirements for not wrapped.
B. Leave individual wrapping in place until finishing occurs.
C. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or
installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Glued-Laminated Structural Units:
1. Substitutions: See Section 016000- Product Requirements.
2.02 GLUED-LAMINATED UNITS
A. Glued-Laminated Units: Fabricate in accordance with AITC 117 Industrial grade.
1. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication.
2. Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit.
3. Fabricate member with camber built in.
4. Do not splice or join members in locations other than those indicated without permission.
5. After end trimming, seal with penetrating sealer in accordance with AITC requirements.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Lumber: Softwood lumber conforming to RIS grading rules with 12 percent maximum moisture
content before fabrication. Design for the following values:
1. Bending (Fb): 2400 psi.
2. Tension Parallel to Grain (Ft): 1100 psi.
3. Compression Parallel to Grain (Fc): 1650 psi.
4. Compression Perpendicular to Grain Bottom (Fc1): 650 psi.
5. Compression Perpendicular to Grain Top (Fc1): 650 psi.
6. Horizontal Shear(Fv): 265 psi.
7. Modulus of Elasticity(E): 1,800,000 psi.
8. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
9. Provide sustainably harvested lumber, certified or labeled as specified in Section 016000.
10. Provide lumber harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
11. Lumber fabricated from timber recovered from riverbeds or otherwise abandoned is
permitted, unless otherwise noted, provided it is clean and free of contamination; identify
source.
a. Where used for structural applications, provide lumber re-graded by an inspection
service accredited by the American Lumber Standard Committee, Inc.
2 - 061800 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. Steel Connections and Brackets: ASTM A36/A36M weldable quality, galvanize per ASTM
Al23/A123M.
2.04 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Factory-Treated Lumber: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for
pressure impregnated wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service
conditions, and specific applications.
B. Fire Retardant Treatment:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc: www.wolmanizedwood.com.
2. Exterior Type: AWPA U1 Use Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H, chemically
treated and pressure impregnated; maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84 and with no evidence of significant combustion when test is
extended for an additional 30 minutes both before and after accelerated weathering test
performed in accordance with ASTM D2898.
a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent prior to
lamination.
3. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low
temperature (low hygroscopic)type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated;
maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 and with
no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes.
a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent prior to
lamination.
b. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may
become wet.
4. Marking: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with
specified requirements.
C. Preservative Pressure Treatment:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc: www.wolmanizedwood.com.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate glue laminated structural members in accordance with AITC Industrial grade.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that supports are ready to receive units.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of bearing items.
3.03 ERECTION
A. Lift members using protective straps to prevent visible damage.
B. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct positions or sloped where indicated.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum from true position.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800- 3
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 062000
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Finish carpentry items.
B. Hardware and attachment accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 061054 -Wood Blocking and Curbing: Grounds and support framing.
B. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AWI P-200-Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards; 2005, 8th Ed., Version 2.0.
B. HPVA HP-1 -American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood
Plywood &Veneer Association; 2004.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods,jointing details,
accessories, to a minimum scale of 1-1/2 inch to 1 ft.
C. Samples:
1. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 12 inch long.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated,
Custom grade.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum five years of documented experience.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect work from moisture damage.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
B. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, installation of associated and
adjacent components, and tenant interior finishes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS
2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS
A. Interior Softwood Lumber
1. Type 1: Doug Fir species; smooth sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with
mixed grain.
B. Interior Hardwood Lumber:
1. Type 1: Paint grade clear poplar; maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with mixed
grain.
C. Exterior Hardwood Lumber
1. Type 1:Western Red Cedar
August 21, 2013 FINISH CARPENTRY 062000 - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
2. Grade: A Clear
3. Pattern:Flush Joint(S2S)
4. Size:1x6
5. Kiln Dried
6. Finish:Pre-Finished- Clear, transparent sealer
2.03 ADHESIVE
A. Adhesive: ASTM A 775/A 775MVOC content shall be less than current content limits set forth in
South coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168.
2.04 FASTENINGS
A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; no finish in concealed locations and blind finish
in exposed locations.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.
Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
B. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use
additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
3.03 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING
A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.
END OF SECTION
2 - 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 071113
BITUMINOUS DAMP-PROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Bituminous dampproofing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 02930 Exterior Plants -planting soils
B. Section 03300 -Cast in Place Concrete
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and
Waterproofing; 2011.
B. ASTM D1227 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for
Roofing; 1995 (Reapproved 2007).
C. ASTM D2822/D2822M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Containing;
2005 (Reapproved 2011)el.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide properties of primer, bitumen, and mastics.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application
until dampproofing has cured.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Karnak Corporation: www.karnakcorp.com.
B. Mar-Flex Systems, Inc: www.mar-flex.com.
C. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com.
D. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 COLD ASPHALTIC MATERIALS
A. Bitumen: Emulsified asphalt, ASTM D1227; with fiber reinforcement other than asbestos (Type
II).
B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41, compatible with substrate.
C. Sealing Mastic: Asphalt roof cement, ASTM D2822, Type I.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable, free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of
dampproofing system.
C. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive dampproofing are securely installed.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive dampproofing.
B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
August 21, 2013 BITUMINOUS DAMP-PROOFING 071113- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
C. Do not apply dampproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.
D. Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, or minor honeycomb in substrate.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply bitumen with roller in one coat at a rate recommended by manufacturer.
C. Seal items projecting through dampproofing surface with mastic. Seal watertight.
D. Coordinate top of damp-proofing with top of planting soil. Apply damp-proofing to 1 inch below
top of soil.
3.04 SCHEDULE
A. Apply Dampproofing to the following areas:
1. New concrete stem walls containing plantings.
END OF SECTION
2 - 071113 BITUMINOUS DAMP-PROOFING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 072100
INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.' Insulation at underside of on-grade floor slabs and perimeter foundation wall, underside of floor
slabs, and wall cavities and roofs.
B. Foam insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall
and roof.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 3300-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Floor slabs.
B. Section 054000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: "Z" Furring
C. Section 072119 - Foamed-In-Place Insulation: Plastic foam insulation other than boards.
D. Section 072126 - Blown Insulation: Blown-in, gravity-held fibrous insulation.
E. Section 07 2119- Foamed In Place Insulation.
F. Section 07 2500 -Weather Barriers: Air barrier and vapor retarder materials.
G. Section 07 5525- Monolithic Membrane: Rigid insulation over roofing membrane.
H. Section 078400 - Firestopping: Insulation as part of fire-rated through-penetration assemblies.
I. Section 092116- Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2012.
B. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;
2010.
C. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board; 2012.
D. ASTM D 6817 - Standard specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene GeoFoam
E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2012.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3300 Submittals, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each type of
insulation. Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to
successful installation.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with Section 072500 for installation of vapor retarder.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The Installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which insulation work is to
be performed and notify the Architect in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with
the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the
Installer.
August 21, 2013 INSULATION 072100 - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. Weather Conditions: Proceed with work only when weather conditions are in compliance with
manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed
in accordance with requirements and the manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Do not apply insulation to damp, frozen, dirty, dusty, or surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.
D. Coordinate this work with all trades and protect it after installation.
E. Coordinate disposal of packing and shipping materials with Project Waste Management Plan.
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings:ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
4. Sequence work to ensure fireproofing and firestop materials are in place before beginning
work of this section.
C. VOC Limits for Glass Fiber Blanket Insulation: Provide either GreenGuard certified, or
formaldehyde-free products
D. Definition: "R" value designation is the thermal resistance of insulation only and does not include
alleged air spaces or other factors assumed to result in higher"R"values.
E. Mock-up:
1. Provide mock-ups in accordance with Section 014500.
2. Approved mock-up may be used in the work.
1.09 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight; except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site
before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01 BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS (TYPES 1 - 10)
A. Expanded Polystyrene Geofoam (Insulation Type 1):
1. ASTM D 6817.
2. Block sizes: 4'w x 8-16' long.
3. Thickness: 3"to 30".
4. Compressive Resistance: 40 psi.
5. Manufacturers:
a. R-Control - GeoFoam.
b. GeoTech Corp. "Terralite".
6. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation (Insulation Type 2):
a. ASTM C 578, Type IV.
2- 072100 INSULATION August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
b. Board Size: 24x96 inch.
c. Provide drainage grooves on one side.
d. Board Edges: Square.
e. Thermal Resistance: R-5 per inch.
f. Compressive Resistance: 60 psi.
g. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.5 percent, volume.
h. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed of 5/165 in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
i. Manufacturers:
1) Dow Styrofoam PlazaMate.
2) Ownes-Corning Foamular 600.
7. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation (Insulation Type 3):
a. ASTM C 578, Type IV.
b. Board Size: 24x96 inch.
c. Provide drainage grooves on one side.
d. Board Edges: Square.
e. Thermal Resistance: R-5 per inch.
f. Compressive Resistance: 25 psi.
g. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.5 percent, volume.
h. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed of 5/165 in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
i. Manufacturers:
1) Dow Styrofoam DeckMate.
2) Owens-Corning Foamular.
8. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation (Insulation Type 5):
a. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
b. Tapered as required.
c. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
d. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
e. Compressive Strength: 16 psi.
f. Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C 1289 type II, Class 1.
g. Facing: Asphalt felt or mat both faces.
h. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch.
i. Long-term Thermal Resistance: R-value of 6 per inch minimum.
j. Board Edges: Square.
k. HCFC's: zero.
I. Board Density: 1.8 lb/cu ft. min.
m. Flame Spread: 75 max per ASTM E 84.
n. Manufacturers:
1) Atlas Roofing Corporation: www.atlasroofing.com.
2) Dyplast Products.
3) Apache Products Co: www.apacheproducts.com.
4) Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com.
5) GAF: www.gaf.com.
9. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation (Insulation Type 7):
a. Compressive Strength: 25 psi.
b. Rigid closed cell foam, complying with ASTM C 1289 Type I, Class 1.
c. Facing: Reflective foil both faces.
d. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch.
e. Long-term Thermal Resistance: R-30 R-value of 6 per inch minimum.
f. Board Edges: Square.
g. HCFC's: zero.
August 21, 2013 INSULATION 072100-3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
h. Water Absorption: In accordance with ASTM D 2842 3.5 percent by volume
maximum.
i. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed of 40-60/50-170 in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
j. Manufacturers:
1) Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com;
2) Product: Dow Thermax TM
2.02 FIBERGLASS BATT AND LOOSE FILL INSULATION MATERIALS (TYPES 11 -20)
A. Unfaced Batt Insulation (Insulation Type 11):
1. ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber batt; friction fit.
2. Thermal Resistance - High Density: R-3.8 per inch.
3. Formaldehyde Free.
4. Facing: Unfaced.
5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 75/150, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
6. Manufacturers:
a. John Manville.
b. Knauf
c. No substitution.
7. Vinyl Faced Batt Insulation (Insulation Type 12):
a. Thermal Resistance: R-19.
b. Formadehyde free.
c. Facing: White vinyl scrim.
d. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/smoke developed index of 75/150,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
e. Manufacturers:
1) Johns Manville.
8. Loose Fill Fiberglass Insulation (Insulation Type 13)
a. Thermal Resistance: approx 4.2 per inch
b. Formaldehyde Free
c. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/smoke developed index of 75/150,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
d. Manufacturers
1) Certainteed - Optima Loose Fill Fiber Glass Insulation
2) Johns Manville- Spider Custom Insulation
3) Knauf-Jet Stream Ultra Blowing Insulation
9. Types 14-20 Not Used.
2.03 MINERAL FIBER INSULATION MATERIALS (TYPES 21 - 30)
A. Semi-Rigid Batt Insulation (Insulation Type 21): ASTM C 665; preformed mineral fiber blanket;
conforming to the following:
1. Thermal Resistance: R of 4.3 per inch.
2. Thickness: 3 inch.
3. Facing: Unfaced
4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/0, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
5. UL labeled.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Thermafiber.
b. Fibrex.
c. Roxul.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
7. Types 22-30 Not Used.
4- 072100 INSULATION August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
2.04 EXPANDING FOAM INSULATION (TYPES 31 -40)
A. Expanding Urethane Foam (Type 31):
1. Dow Great Stuff Pro Gaps and Cracks.
2. BASF ZeroDraft
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
4. Types 32-40 Not Used.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide.
B. Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of galvanized steel with washer retainer and clips, to be
adhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate,
capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place.
C. Interior Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application with adhesive
criteria in compliance per Section 01 1115 Green Building Practices.
D. Roof Insulation Adhesive:
1. Dow"Insta-Stik"Quik Set Commercial Roofing Adhesive.
2. BASF Ameriglue FE 740 Roofing Adhesive.
3. Provide other accessories, not specifically described, but required for secure and tight
installation of insulation with complete insulation fill within cavities, and continuous vapor
retarder.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are
ready to receive insulation and adhesive.
B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or
substances that may impede adhesive bond.
C. Where insulation adhesive is to be used, verify compatibility with substrate before proceeding.
3.02 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION (HORIZONTAL)
A. Verify substrate is ready to accept placement of insulation panels.
B. Loose lay insulation over drainage panels.
C. Butt joints tightly with maximum gap of 3/8 inch.
D. Stagger joints 24 inches typical with 8 inch minimum.
E. The bottom layer is to be the thickest layer with 2 inch minimum.
F. Successive layers are to be unbonded.
G. Stagger joints of successive layers.
3.03 BATT INSTALLATION UNDER ELEVATED CONCRETE SLABS
A. Place insulation under slabs at locations indicated on plans.
B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
C. Install insulation tight to underside of slab with adhered stick pins and washers installed in strict
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not over compress insulation.
D. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged.
3.04 LOOSE FILL INSULATION AT WALL CAVITIES
A. Install loose fill insulation in strict accordance with manufacturer's requirements to meet the
scheduled R values.
B. Do not commence installation until all piping, conduit and all related mechanical and electric
work is done.
August 21, 2013 INSULATION 072100- 5
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
C. Trim excess insulation flush with the interior face of the wall framing.
3.05 WINDOW WALL AND CURTAIN WALL INSULATION
A. Tightly fill void between spandrel material and backpan.
B. Backpan is to be fully sealed.
3.06 EXPANDING FOAM INSULATION
A. Install expanding foam crack and gap filler in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Protect adjacent materials from excess material.
C. Do not overfill void. Trim excess material flush to framing.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.
3.08 SCHEDULES
A. Stud Cavity at Metal/Wood Framed Exterior Rain Screen Walls: Type 13 (R23).
B. Ground Floor Unconditioned Space under conditioned space: Insulation Type 12 (R19).
C. Furred CMU exterior walls: Insulation Type 13 (R23).
D. Main Building Roof: Insulation Type 5 or 7 (R19 min.)
E. Furred or framed shaft walls connected to unconditioned space: Insulation Type 11 (R21).
F. Ground Floor Slab on Grade at Conditioned Space:Type 2 minimum 24 inches wide at
perimeter.
G. Gaps between framing and any type of fenestration framing: Type 31
END OF SECTION
6 - 072100 INSULATION August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 073113
ASPHALT SHINGLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Asphalt shingle roofing.
B. Flexible sheet membranes for eave protection, underlayment, and valley protection.
C. Associated metal flashings and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashing reglets placed at vertical surfaces
of concrete and masonry.
B. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing.
C. Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Edge and cap flashings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D225- Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles (Organic Felt) Surfaced with Mineral
Granules; 2007.
B. ASTM D226- Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing; 2009.
C. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous
Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2011.
D. ASTM D3161 - Standard Test Method for Wind-Resistance of Asphalt Shingles (Fan-Induced
Method); 2012.
E. ASTM D3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced
With Mineral Granules; 2010a.
F. ASTM D3909/D3909M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Glass Felt)Surfaced
With Mineral Granules; 1997b (Reapproved 2012)e1.
G. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007
(Reapproved 2012)e1.
H. ASTM D4869/D4869M - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt
Underlayment Used in Steep Slope Roofing; 2005 (Reapproved 2011)el.
I. ASTM D6380 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic Felt); 2003
(Reapproved 2009).
J. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.
K. ASTM E108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; 2011.
L. ICC-ES AC188-Acceptance Criteria for Roof Underlayments; 2012.
M. ICC-ES AC207-Acceptance Criteria for Polypropylene Roof Underlayments; 2012.
N. Miami (APD)-Approved Products Directory; Miami-Dade County; database at
www.miamidade.gov/development/product-control.asp.
O. NRCA MS104 -The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association;
2001, Fifth Edition, with interim updates.
P. SMACNA(ASMM)-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 2012.
Q. UL (RMSD) - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
August 21, 2013 ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics.
C. Shop Drawings: For metal flashings, indicate specially configured metal flashings.
D. Samples: Submit two samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish
texture/pattern;for color selection.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation criteria and procedures.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Shingles: 20 sq ft of each type and color.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with the recommendations of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual.
1. Maintain one copy of document on site.
B. Products Required to Comply with Fire Resistance Criteria: UL listed and labeled.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-up of 20 sq ft, including underlayment.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mockup may remain as part of the Work.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install shingles or eave protection membrane when surface temperatures are below 45
degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHINGLES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Atlas Roofing Corporation; Pinnacle: www.atlasroofing.com.
2. GAF; Timberline Cool Series: www.gaf.com.
3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B. Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt-coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM
D3462; Class A fire resistance.
1. Wind Resistance: Class F, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3161.
2. Warranted Wind Speed: Not less than tested wind resistance.
3. Miami-Dade County approved.
4. Algae Resistant.
5. Weight: lb/100 sq ft.
6. Self-sealing type.
7. Style: match existing.
8. Color: match existing.
2.02 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Mineral Surfaced Roll Roofing: Asphalt-coated organic felt, mineral granule surfaced,
complying with ASTM D6380, Class M, Type II, with 2 inch wide selvage; color.
B. Smooth Surfaced Roll Roofing: Asphalt-coated organic felt, with smooth asphalt coating both
sides, complying with ASTM D6380, Class S, Type IV, 39.8 lb/100 sq ft.
C. Eave Protection Membrane: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet complying with
ASTM D1970; 40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene
sheet top surface.
1. Manufacturers:
2 - 073113 ASPHALT SHINGLES August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
a. Certainteed .
b. Malarkey .
c. Grace Construction Products .
D. Underlayment: Synthetic non-asphaltic sheet, intended by manufacturer for mechanically
fastened roofing underlayment without sealed seams.
1. Self Sealability: Passing nail sealability test specified in ASTM D1970.
2. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passing test specified in ASTM D1970.
3. Performance: Meet or exceed requirements for ASTM D226, Type II asphalt-saturated
organic felt.
4. Liquid Water Transmission: Passes ASTM D4869.
5. Functional Temperature Range: Minus 70 degrees F to 212 degrees F.
6. Fasteners: As specified by manufacturer and building code qualification report or
approval, if any.
7. Products:
a. System Components Corporation, Inc.; ProTex: www.systemcomponents.net.
E. Underlayment: Self-adhering rubber-modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D1970; 22
mil total thickness; with strippable release film and woven polypropylene sheet top surface.
1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with requirements of ICC-ES AC188 for
non-self-adhesive sheet.
2. Products:
a. System Components Corporation, Inc.; FelTex SA300: www.systemcomponents.net.
F. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D1970;
40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene sheet top surface.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, of hot-dipped zinc coated steel, 12 gage, 0.105 inch
shank diameter, 3/8 inch head diameter, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing
or 3/4 inch into roof sheathing or decking.
B. Staples: Standard wire shingle type, of hot dipped zinc coated steel, 16 gage, 0.062 inch
diameter, 15/16 inch crown width, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 3/4
inch into roof sheathing or decking.
C. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, asphalt roof cement.
D. Lap Cement: Fibrated cutback asphalt type, recommended for use in application of
underlayment, free of toxic solvents .
2.04 METAL FLASHINGS
A. Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal eave edge, gable edge, ridge, ridge vents, open valley
flashing, chimney flashing, dormer flashing, and other flashing indicated.
1. Form flashings to profiles indicated on Drawings.
B. Sheet Metal: Galvanized steel, as specified in Section 076200.
C. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
B. Verify that deck is of sufficient thickness to accept fasteners.
C. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface.
D. Verify roof openings are correctly framed.
E. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids.
August 21, 2013 ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113-3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Seal roof deck joints wider than 1/16 inch with deck tape.
B. At areas where eave protection membrane is to be adhered to substrate, fill knot holes and
surface cracks with latex filler.
C. Broom clean deck surfaces before installing underlayment or eave protection.
D. Install eave edge flashings tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches and seal with
plastic cement. Secure flange with nails spaced _inches on center.
3.03 INSTALLATION - EAVE PROTECTION MEMBRANE
A. Install eave protection membrane from eave edge to minimum 4 ft up-slope beyond interior face
of exterior wall.
B. Install eave protection membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.04 INSTALLATION - UNDERLAYMENT
A. Items projecting through or mounted on roof: Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic
cement.
3.05 INSTALLATION -VALLEY PROTECTION
A. Install valley protection in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
3.06 INSTALLATION - METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES
A. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches and seal weather tight with plastic cement.
B. Secure in place with nails at 24 inches on center. Conceal fastenings.
C. Items Projecting Through or Mounted on Roofing: Flash and seal weather tight with plastic
cement.
3.07 INSTALLATION - SHINGLES
A. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Fasten individual shingles using 2 nails per shingle, or as required by code, whichever is
greater.
2. Fasten strip shingles using 4 nails per strip, or as required by code, whichever is greater.
B. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure to produce double
thickness over full roof area. Provide double course of shingles at eaves.
C. Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch beyond fascia boards.
D. Extend shingles 1/2 inch beyond face of gable edge fascia boards.
E. Extend shingles on one slope across valley and fasten. Trim shingles from other slope 2 inches
from valley center line to achieve closed cut valley, concealing the valley protection.
F. Extend shingles on both slopes across valley in a weave pattern and fasten. Extend shingles a
minimum of 12 inches beyond valley center line to achieve woven valley, concealing the valley
protection.
G. Cap hips with individual shingles, maintaining 5 inch weather exposure. Place to avoid exposed
nails.
H. After installation, place one daub of plastic cement, one inch diameter under each individual
shingle tab exposed to weather, to prevent lifting.
I. Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting through roof with
weather tight placement of counterflashings.
J. Complete installation to provide weather tight service.
4- 073113 ASPHALT SHINGLES August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113- 5
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 074646
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Siding panels.
B. Soffit panels.
C. Accessories and trim.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Siding substrate.
B. Section 079005- Joint Sealers.
C. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 1998.
B. ASTM C 1185 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement
Flat Sheet, Roofing and Siding Shingles, and Clapboards; 1999.
C. ASTM C 1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Non-Asbestos Fiber Cement Sheets; 1999.
D. ASTM E 72 -Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building
Construction; 1998.
E. ASTM E 84 --Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
1999.
F. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 1995.
G. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At
750 Degrees C; 1999.
H. ASTM E 228 - Standard Test Method for Linear Thermal Expansion of Solid Materials With a
Vitreous Silica Dilatometer; 1995.
I. ASTM G 26 - Standard Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Xenon-Arc Type)
With and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 1996.
J. ASTM E 330-97 - Structural Performance of exterior windows, curtain walls and doors by
uniform static air pressure difference.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods, including nailing patterns.
4. Applicable model code authority evaluation report (ICC, CCMC, etc.)
C. Siding manufacturer's requirements for vapor retarders, primer, paint, etc., to be installed by
others.
D. Maintenance and periodic inspection recommendations.
E. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Samples: For each type of finish indicated on exposed GFRC surfaces, representative of finish,
color, and texture variations expected, approximately 12 inches long by actual thickness.
August 21, 2013 FIBER CEMENT SIDING 074646- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this
section with minimum 3 years of experience.
B. B. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for
fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.
2. a. Include typical components, attachments to building structure, and methods of
installation.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. A. Store products off the ground, on a flat surface, and under a roof or separate waterproof
covering.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide WeatherBoards 50 year limited siding warranty.
B. CertainTeed ColorMax Finish - provide 15 year limited paint warranty
C. Register manufacturer's warranty, made out in Owner's name, with copy to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. CertainTeed Corporation, Siding Products Group, P.O. Box 860, Valley Forge, Pennsylvania
19482. ASD. Tel: (800)233-8990 (professional)or(800) 782-8777 (consumer).
www.certainteed.com.
B. Substitutions: Not permitted.
C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 016000.
2.02 PANELS
A. Fiber Cement Board Panels-General: CertainTeed Fiber Cement Board Panels consist of
cement, recycled content and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure into boards with
integral surface texture; complying with ASTM C 1186 Type A Grade II; machined edges; for
nail attachment.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 0, smoke developed index of 5,
maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 (Class I/A).
2. Flammability: Noncombustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136.
3. Flexural Strength: At least 1450 psi (10 MPa)when in equilibrium condition, and at least
1015 psi (7 MPa)when in wet condition, tested in accordance with ASTM C 1185.
4. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: Less than 1 x 10A-5/inch/inch/degree F (0.5 x
10A-5/degree C), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 228.
5. Freeze Thaw Resistance: At least 80 percent flexural strength retained, when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 1185.
6. UV Resistance: No cracking, checking, or erosion, when tested for 2000 hours in
accordance with ASTM G 26.
7. Water Tightness: No water droplets on underside, when tested in accordance with ASTM
C 1185.
B. Horizontal Siding: CertainTeed WeatherBoards Lap Siding.
1. Thickness: 5/16 inch (7.9 mm), plus or minus.04 inch (1 mm).
2. Length: 12 feet(3657 mm), plus 0, minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3. Style: Trim board siding
4. Style: Cedar lap siding.
a. Width: 6-1/4 inches (159 mm)wide.
5. Sealant/Primer: FiberTect Sealant/Primer.
6. Field Finish Paint: 100 percent acrylic latex as specified in Section 09900.
2 - 074646 FIBER CEMENT SIDING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
7. Factory Stain Finish: Factory applied CertainTeed Fiber Cement Siding Premium Stain
color as follows:
a. Maple.
b. Cedar.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Trim: CertainTeed WeatherBoards Trim
1. Size:
a. Thickness 7/16 inch (11 mm) plus or minus (1 mm).
b. Width:
1) 3-1/2 inch (89 mm).
2) 5-1/2 inch (140 mm).
c. Length: 12 feet(3.657 m) plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.17 mm).
2. Sealant/Primer: FiberTect Sealant/Primer.
B. Trim: Western red cedar lumber, without knotholes, checks, or cracks; 1 inch (25 mm) nominal
thickness.
C. Trim: Pressure preservative treated southern pine, without knotholes, checks, or cracks, No.1
grade or better; 1 inch (25 mm)nominal thickness.
D. Provide the following trim:
1. Starter strip for lap siding.
2. Outside corners, butted to siding.
3. Outside corners, overlapping siding.
E. Sealant: Paintable, 100 percent acrylic latex caulk complying with ASTM C 920.
F. Sheet Metal Flashing: Minimum 26 gauge hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, or coated
aluminum.
G. Nails: Length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4 inch ( 32mm) into solid backing;
hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel.
H. Building Paper: Kraft or bituminous paper; not polyethylene or foil.
I. Field Finish Paint: 100 percent acrylic latex as specified in Section 099000.
J. Touch Up Kit: Provide CertainTeed Color Max touch-up kit for each color provided.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Examine substrate and clean and repair as required to eliminate conditions that would be
detrimental to proper installation.
B. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. A. Examine, clean, and repair as necessary any substrate conditions that would be detrimental
to proper installation.
B. B. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
1. Read warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage.
2. Install in accordance with conditions stated in model code evaluation report applicable to
location of project.
3. Use trim details indicated on drawings.
4. Touch up all field cut edges before installing.
5. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage.
B. Over Wood Studs Without Sheathing: Install building paper over studs prior to installing siding.
August 21, 2013 FIBER CEMENT SIDING 074646- 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
C. Over Wood and Wood-Composite Sheathing: Fasten siding through sheathing into studs.
D. Over Foam Sheathing: Read and comply with sheathing manufacturer's recommendations.
1. For sheathing of 1 inch (25 mm)thickness or less, nail through sheathing into studs using
correspondingly longer nails.
E. Over Masonry Walls: Install furring strips of adequate thickness to accept full length of nails and
spaced at 16 inches (406 mm)on center.
F. Over Steel Studs: Minimum 20 gauge steel, 3 5/8" (92 mm) C-studs. Use 1-5/8" (41 mm) long,
#8-18 x 3/8" HD self-tapping, corrosion-resistant ribbed bugle head screws. Attach siding at
each stud insuring that at least 3 screw threads penetrate the studs.
G. Diagonal Siding: Follow manufacturer's instructions.
H. Allow space between both ends of siding panels that butt against trim for thermal movement;
seal joint between panel and trim with exterior grade sealant.
I. Joints in Horizontal Siding: Avoid joints in lap siding except at corners; where joints are
inevitable stagger joints between successive courses.
J. Joints in Vertical Siding: Install Z-flashing in horizontal joints between successive courses of
vertical siding.
K. Furred Installation: Leave space at top and bottom open; top may be behind soffit; at bottom
install insect screen over opening by wrapping a strip of screen over bottom ends of vertical
furring strips.
L. Install sheet metal flashing above door and window casings and horizontal trim in field of siding.
M. Do not install siding less than 6 inches (150 mm)from surface of ground nor closer than 1 inch
(25 mm)to roofs, patios, porches, and other surfaces where water may collect.
N. After installation, seal all joints except lap joints of lap siding. Seal around all penetrations. Paint
all exposed cut edges.
O. Finish Painting: Specified in Section 09900.
P. Finish Painting: Within 24 months after installation, paint siding and trim with one coat finish
paint.
Q. Finish Painting: Within 24 months after installation, paint siding and trim with one coat primer
and two coats finish paint.
3.04 CLEANING
A. At completion of work, remove debris caused by siding installation from project site.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
4- 074646 FIBER CEMENT SIDING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 075400
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) membrane roofing system.
2. Roof insulation (with cover board).
3. Pavers.
4. Walkway pads.
5. Roof insulation (with cover board).
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"for metal roof penetration flashings,
flashings, and counterflashings.
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
4. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties"for roof drains.
C. Substitutions: Substitutions will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual"for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not
permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement,
and exposure to weather without failure.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C. Roofing System Design: Provide a membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that
have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift
pressure calculated according to ASCE 7.
D. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply
with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system and that
are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide"for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable.
Identify materials with FMG markings.
1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.
2. Hail Resistance: SH.
E. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 101 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based
on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.
F. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial solar reflectance not less than 0.77 and
initial emissivity not less than 0.85 when tested according to CRRC-1.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include product specifications and
manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Samples for Initial Selection:
1. Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.
2. Roof insulation.
3. Walkway pads or rolls.
4. Metal termination bars.
August 21, 2013 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 075400 - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
5. Six(6) insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish.
C. Samples for verification:
1. 12-by-12-inch square of sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end
lap seam.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer and each of
the persons doing the actual installation are approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer
to install roofing system.
E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system
complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements"Article.
1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer certifying that the Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed
by membrane roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible
to receive manufacturer's special warranty.
G. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed
roofing installation.
H. Submit letter from the membrane manufacturer confirming that the completed membrane
roofing system will achieve a minimum UL Class A Fire Rating, and shall be listed in the current
U.L. Directory.
I. Submit letter from the membrane manufacturer confirming that the completed membrane
roofing system shall meet and/or exceed IBC Basic Wind Speed Design Criteria of 90 MPH, 3
second gust duration, Exposure B, urban and suburban areas. IBC uplift pressures shall be
calculated in accordance with ASCE 7 "Minimum Design Loads for Building and Other
Structures".
1. Letter shall confirm field, perimeter, and corner values in pounds per square foot.
J. Submit letter from the membrane manufacturer confirming that the completed membrane
roofing system and associated roof edge metal systems comply with ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Roof
Edge Standards.
K. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system.
L. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
M. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
N. Submit sample of the membrane manufacturer's 20 year Total System No Dollar Limit"
Warranty for labor and materials.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing
system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from or approved by
roofing membrane manufacturer.
C. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A;for application and roof slopes indicated, as
determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency.
Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1. Attendance
a. Owner's Representative
b. Architect
2 - 075400 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
c. Architect's Building Enclosure Consultant
d. Roofing Installer
e. Testing and Inspecting Agency Representative
f. Membrane manufacturer's technical representative
g. Deck Installer
h. Installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof
accessories and roof-mounted equipment
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,
including flatness and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment
curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
F. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect
roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions
for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid
material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf
life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's no dollar limit form, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace without, monetary limitation, components of membrane roofing system that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include roof leaks and damages to interior finishes, equipment and furnishings
caused by or related to leaks and any other roofing system failures.
2. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane
accessories, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, vapor retarder, walkway products,
and other components of membrane roofing system.
3. Warranty includes all components of the vegetated roofing (alternate)as specified in
section 329500 if the alternate is selected by the University.
August 21, 2013 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 075400 - 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
4. Warranty Period: 20 years "No Dollar Limit" (NDL)from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty signed by Installer,
covering the Work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing system such
as membrane roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards,
vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 THERMOPLASTIC ROOFING MEMBRANE
A. Membrane: Fabric-reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin sheet: Uniform, flexible sheet formed
from a thermoplastic polyolefin, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, and as follows:
1. Approved Manufacturers
a. Basis of Design:
1) Firestone UltraPly TPO
2) Acceptable alternate manufacturers:
(a) Johns Manville TPO Roofing Membrane
(b) Carlisle Syntec Incorporated
2. Thickness: 80 mil thickness
3. Exposed Face Color: White
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with membrane roofing.
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. All products shall be furnished by single-source manufacturer and specifically formulated for the
intended purpose.
C. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing,
55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.
D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard water-based bonding adhesive for membrane, and
solvent based bonding adhesive for base flashings.
E. Cut Edge Sealant: Manufacturer's standard caulk to seal cut edges.
F. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,
approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
G. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting
corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate,
and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer to be used for mechanical
attachment of insulation and to provide additional membrane securement.
H. Clad Metal Flashing: Manufacturer's standard minimum 24 gage galvanized steel, white with 40
mil minimum non-reinforced membrane laminated to steel. The sheet is cut to the appropriate
width and used to fabricate metal drip edges or other roof perimeter edging profiles, including
scupper and drain boxes. TPO Membrane may be heat welded directly to the coated metal.
I. Cleaning Solvent: Manufacturer's standard to clean surfaces to received adhered products.
J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, termination
reglets, cover strips, seam cleaners, and other accessories as recommended by manufacturer.
2.03 INSULATION, COVER BOARD, AND TAPERED CRICKET MATERIALS
A. Rigid Foam Board Insulation:
1. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Closed-cell polyisocyanurate foam core with a
hydrocarbon blowing agent; integrally laminated to heavy coated glass fiber facers;
conform to ASTM C 1289, Type II; FS HH-l- 1972/2, Class 1; UL 790 (ASTM E 108) Class
A; FM 4450/4470 Class 1 fire rating.
4-075400 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
2. R-Value: as shown on drawings.
3. Compressive strength: Minimum 25psi
4. Rigid flat stock polyisocyanurate insulation shall be installed in two separate layers of
thickness indicated on drawings, or 2.0 inch thick material, resulting in a minimum overall
thickness of 4.0 inches. The insulation shall be mechanically fastened or adhered to the
substrate in accordance with the manufacturer's published specifications. Combined two
layers of insulation shall equate to a minimum LTTR-Value of 24.0.
5. Approved Products: As approved by Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing Manufacturer
B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards to produce minimum slope of 1/4
inch per 12 inches in the finished installation unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
D. Tapered Cricket Materials: At specified locations, furnish polyisocyanurate tapered cricket
insulation. Tapered cricket materials are required at HVAC equipment curbs, between roof
drains, and wherever ponding water may occur. Refer to the drawings for identification of these
areas.
1. Compressive strength: Minimum 25psi
E. Cover Board: At all locations, furnish 1/2 inch thick Dens-Deck, Dens-Deck Prime, or Securock
Cover Board materials. Cover board shall be installed over the top of rigid foam board insulating
materials at all locations.
2.04 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with membrane roofing.
B. Insulation Adhesive: FM approved for installation of polyisocyanurate board insulation over
concrete deck.
C. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting
corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to
substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
D. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated to
adhere roof insulation to substrate.
2.05 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 6152, SEBS modified.
2.06 FLEXIBLE WALKWAY PADS
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface
textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane
roofing system manufacturer.
1. Location: as shown on drawings
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof
drains are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
August 21, 2013 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 075400- 5
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is
forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.03 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to
precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof
insulation.
C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
D. Install multiple layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where
overall insulation thickness is 2 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each
succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each
direction.
E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and
does not restrict flow of water.
F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards.
1. Fill all gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.
2. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
G. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation (Steel Deck Applications): Install each layer of
insulation and secure first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically
designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck.
1. Fasten first layer of insulation according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide"for
specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
2. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of
roof.
3. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive.
H. Adhered Insulation (Concrete Roof Deck Applications): Install all layers of insulation in a cold
fluid-applied adhesive.
I. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints
staggered between rows. Stagger joints from joints in insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in
each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and adhere to top layer of insulation.
1. Fasten according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide"for specified Windstorm
Resistance Classification.
2. Fasten to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
3.04 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing.
1. Install system in accordance with the manufacturer's 20 year warranty requirements.
2. Hot air weld the membrane sheets a minimum of 1-1/2"with an Automatic Hot Air Welding
Machine.
6- 075400 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3. Membrane that has been exposed to the elements for approximately 7 days must be
prepared with membrane cleaner prior to hot-air welding. Apply cleaner to a clean, natural
fiber rag and remove contaminants by using a scrubbing motion. Allow the membrane to
dry thoroughly prior to hot air welding.
4. Install adjoining membrane sheets in the same manner in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications.
5. A surface splice of Non-Reinforced Flashing must be applied over all "T"joint splice
intersections. Refer to manufacturer's technical manual.
B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's
technical personnel.
C. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply water-based bonding adhesive to substrate at rate required by
manufacturer and immediately install roofing membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to
splice area of roofing membrane.
E. Adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of
roofing.
F. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of
roofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam
installation.
1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut
edges of roofing membrane.
2. Verification of field strength of seams:
a. In conditions where roof membrane will be hot air welded in temperatures greater
than 50°F, verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam
sample areas
b. In conditions where roof membrane will be hot air welded in temperatures less than
50°F, verify field strength of seams a minimum of four times daily and repair seam
sample areas.
3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that does not meet
requirements.
H. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing
membrane in place with clamping ring.
I. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical
personnel.
J. Adhere roofing membrane at corners, perimeters, and transitions according to requirements in
ANSI/SPRI RP-4.
K. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing
membrane in place with clamping ring.
L. Fall Restraint Tie-off Penetrations:At Fall Restraint Tie-off Penetrations, install TPO pre-molded
pipe flashings. Complete detail using stainless steel clamping ring and flash per manufacturer's
detail.
3.05 FLASHING
A. Flash all walls and curbs with reinforced membrane. Non-Reinforced membrane shall be limited
to inside and outside corners, field fabricated pipe seals, scuppers and Sealant Pockets where
the use of premolded accessories are not practical. Terminate the flashing in accordance with
an appropriate manufacturer's Termination Details. To satisfy manufacturer's warranty
requirements, membrane wall flashings must be terminated with termination bar at all locations,
even when sheet metal counter-flashings overlap the membrane.
August 21, 2013 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 075400- 7
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. Follow manufacturer's typical flashing procedures for all wall, curb, and penetration flashings
including metal edging/coping and roof drain applications.
C. At wall locations, extend wall flashing materials up and over the top, and down the outside edge
where possible. Terminate the membrane per manufacturer's requirements.
D. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according
to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required
rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.
F. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing.
G. Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and
end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
H. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars where recommended by roofing materials manufacturer.
3.06 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or
adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
B. Roof tests:
1. Utilize Electric Field Vector Mapping (EFVM)to test roof membrane assembly for breaches
in the membrane allowing water infiltration.
2. Notify Architect and Owner minimum 48 hours in advance of date and time of testing.
3. Repair areas where leaks are detected via EFVM testing.
C. Final Roof Inspection: Provide manufacturer's technical personnel inspection of roofing
installation upon completion and submit report to Architect.
1. Notify Architect and Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
D. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or
inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.08 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction
period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition
free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty
requirements.
END OF SECTION
8- 075400 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 076100
CUSTOM SHEET METAL ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Standing seam metal roofing, associated flashings, and underlayment at canopies.
B. Counterflashings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
B. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008.
C. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007
(Reapproved 2012)e1.
D. SMACNA (ASMM)-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 2012.
E. AAMA 2605—Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide complete sheet metal roofing system, including, but not limited to,
custom-fabricated metal roof pans, cleats, clips, anchors and fasteners, sheet metal flashing
and drainage components related to sheet metal roofing, fascia panels, trim, underlayment, and
accessories as indicated and as required for a weathertight installation.
B. B. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide custom-fabricated sheet metal roofing capable of resisting
the following design negative uplift pressure. Provide clips, fasteners, and clip spacings of type
indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 3 times the design
negative uplift pressure.
1. 1. Design Negative Uplift Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.
a. C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal roofing that allows for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and
surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation,
overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and
other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a
result of sheet metal roofing thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat
loss.
1) 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F , ambient; 180 deg F , material
surfaces.
b. D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal roofing that does not allow water infiltration
to building interior, with metal flashing and connections of sheet metal roofing lapped
to allow moisture to run over and off the material.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern,jointing details, fastening methods,
flashings, terminations, seams, clips and other attachments, roof penetrations, connections to
adjoining work, trim and installation details.
C. Product Data: Provide data on metal types, finishes, characteristics.
D. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inches in size illustrating metal finish color.
August 21, 2013 CUSTOM SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and
standard details, except as otherwise noted.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing sheet metal roof installations with
minimum 5 years of experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal
sheets to ensure drainage.
B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. Defective
work includes degradation of metal finish.
C. Provide 10 year manufacturer warranty for degradation of metal finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel Sheet (Sub-framing): ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; 24
gage core steel.
B. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel Sheet (Roofing): ASTM A 792/AZ50, with Zincalume zinc
coating; 24 gage core steel, shop pre-coated with PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride)coating; color
as selected.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Stainless steel, with soft neoprene washers.
B. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.
C. Solder: ASTM B32; Sn50 (50/50)type.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, one gage thicker than roofing sheet, minimum 3
inches wide, interlockable with sheet.
C. Fabricate starter strips, interlockable with sheet.
D. Form pieces in longest practical lengths.
E. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.
F. Form material with standing seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use
sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.
2.04 FACTORY FINISHING
A. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish,AAMA 2605
(Kynar 500); multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as scheduled.
B. Primer Coat: On coated sheets, finish concealed side of sheet with primer compatible with finish
system as recommended by finish system manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that required sub-framing/furring is in place and ready to receive roofing materials
B. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2 - 076100 CUSTOM SHEET METAL ROOFING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with
protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.
3.03 INSTALLATION - STANDING SEAM ROOFING
A. Conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual details.
B. Lay sheets with long dimension perpendicular to eaves. Apply pans beginning at eaves.
C. Lock cleats into seams.
D. No transverse joints of roofing sheets allowed. Provide full length pans at all locations.
E. At eaves, terminate roofing by hooking over edge strip.
F. Finish standing seams 1 inch high on flat surfaces
G. Bend up one side edge 1-1/2 inches and other edge 1-3/4 inches.
H. Make first fold 1/4 inch wide single fold and second fold 1/2 inch wide, providing locked portion
of standing seam, 5 plies in thickness.
I. Fold lower ends of seams at eaves over at 45 degree angle.
J. Terminate standing seams at eaves by turning down with tapered fold.
K. Provide matching touch up paint at all exposed cut or scratched metal surfaces.
3.04 INSTALLATION - BUILT-IN GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
A. Secure gutter lining to substrate with cleats spaced maximum 48" inches on center along edges
of gutters.
B. Longitudinal joints not acceptable.
C. At roof edges, extend gutter lining under metal roofing 6 inches minimum and terminate in 3/4
inch folded edge secured by cleats. Hook lower end of roofing into lock strip to form 3/4 inch
wide loose-lock seam.
D. Seal gutters watertight. Seal joint of gutter to drain.
3.05 INSTALLATION - FLASHINGS
A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where
permitted.
B. Cleat and seam all joints.
C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines
accurate to profiles.
3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as sheet metal roofing
is installed.
1. On completion of sheet metal roofing installation, clean finished surfaces, including
removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain
in a clean condition during construction.
D. Replace panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
August 21, 2013 CUSTOM SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100- 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1. Do not permit traffic over unprotected roof surface.
END OF SECTION
4- 076100 CUSTOM SHEET METAL ROOFING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 076200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including (lashings, counterflashings, gutters, and downspouts.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 075400 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing
B. Section 079005- Joint Sealers.
C. Section 086200- Unit Skylights: Metal curbs.
D. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.
E. Division 16: Roof curbs for mechanical equipment.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA 2603-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2002.
B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
C. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007
(Reapproved 2012)e1.
D. SMACNA(ASMM)-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 2012.
E. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
F. A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and
fastener disengagement.
G. B. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due
to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed
sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
H. C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist
rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base
engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F , ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces.
I. E. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to
building interior.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Samples: Submit two samples, 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating material and finish of typical
flashing.
C. Samples: Submit two samples 12 inch in size illustrating metal finish color.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and
standard details, except as otherwise Indicated.
August 21, 2013 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 3 years of
documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope
metal sheets to ensure drainage.
B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel:ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick
base metal.
B. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02
inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating.
1. Modified Silicone Polyester Coating: Pigmented Organic Coating System,AAMA 2605;
baked enamel finish system.
2. Modified Silicone Polyester Coating: Pigmented Organic Coating System, AAMA 2605;
baked enamel finish system; color as scheduled.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers.
B. Primer: Zinc chromate type.
C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.
D. Sealant: Type specified in Section 079005.
E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.
D. Form material with standing seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use
sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.
E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with
sealant.
F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm)and hemmed to form
drip.
G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 4 inches over roofing flexible flashings. Return and
brake edges.
2.04 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION
A. Downspouts: Rectangular profile.
B. Gutters and Downspouts: Size for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 5
years in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
C. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.
1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements.
2. Gutter Supports: Brackets.
3. Downspout Supports: Brackets.
4. Seal metal joints.
2 -076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets
in place, and nailing strips located.
B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
C. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant.
C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film
thickness of 15 mil.
D. Provide fully soldered or sealed corners and laps
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where
permitted.
B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines
accurate to profiles.
D. Seal metal joints watertight in accordance with SMACNA.
E. Secure downspouts in place using concealed fasteners.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 -3
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 077223
ROOF HATCHES AND VENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Prefabricated roof hatches operable hardware, and counterflashings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 4500 - Contractor Quality Control.
B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: framed opening
C. Section 07 2500 -Weather Barriers: continuity of vapor barrier
D. Section 07 5400 -Thermoplastic Membrane roofing: integration with flashing
E. Section 08 7100- Door Hardware: padlock and keys
F. Section 09 9960 - High Performance Coatings: field finish
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3300- Submittals, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on unit construction, sizes, configuration,jointing methods and
locations when applicable, and attachment method.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ROOF HATCHES
A. Unit: Single leaf type.
1. 36"x 96" inch size.
B. Integral Aluminum Curb: 11 gage mill finished aluminum; 1 inch minimum rigid glass fiber
insulation; integral cap flashing to receive roof flashings; extended flange for mounting.
C. Flush Aluminum Cover: 11 gage mill finish aluminum; 1 inch glass fiber insulation; 22 gage
minimum aluminum interior liner; continuous neoprene gasket to provide weatherproof seal.
D. Hardware: Cadmium plated finish:
1. Compression spring operator and shock absorbers.
2. Steel manual pull handle for interior operation.
3. Padlock hasp on interior.
4. Hinges: Manufacturer's recommended type.
E. Accessories: retractable safety post.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components free of visual distortion or defects. Weld corners and joints.
B. Provide for removal of condensation occurring within components or assembly.
C. Fit components for weather tight assembly.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Coordinate with installation of roofing system and related flashings for weather tight installation.
C. Apply bituminous paint on surfaces of units in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar
metals.
D. Adjust hinges for smooth operation.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 ROOF HATCHES AND VENTS 077223- 1
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 078400
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Firestopping materials.
B. Firestopping of all penetrations and interruptions to fire rated assemblies, whether indicated on
drawings or not, and other openings indicated.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07212 - Board and Batt Insulation.
B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing.
C. Division 15: Fire stopping of all mechanical work.
D. Division 16: Fire stopping of all electrical work.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E 814- Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; 1997.
B. FM P7825-Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.
C. UL (FRD)- Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics and emission levels of Volatile Organic
Compounds.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs which provide the specified fire ratings
when tested in accordance with methods indicated.
1. Listing in the current classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock
Hersey)will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 3 years experience.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions
during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after
installation of materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. 3M.
B. Spec-Seal.
C. Hilti.
D. Bio.
E. Thermafiber LLC.
August 21, 2013 FIRESTOPPING 078400 - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
2.02 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLIES
A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 that
has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F
Rating and that meets all other specified requirements.
2. Firestoping materials that are considered sealants shall not exceed VOC limits of 250
grams/liter
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may
affect bond of firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials which may affect bond.
C. Install backing or damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, completely closing openings.
B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction.
C. Install labelling required by code.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION
2- 078400 FIRESTOPPING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 079005
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sealants and joint backing.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing
B. Section 07840 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants.
C. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames- Sealants required at frame perimeters.
D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant.
E. Section 09900 - Painting: Sealants used for painting preparation.
F. Division 15- Mechanical - Sealants required at mechanical penetrations and fixture installation
joints.
G. Division 16 - Electrical -Sealants requires at electrical penetrations.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 1995.
B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 1998.
C. ASTM C 1193- Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 1991 (Reapproved 1995).
D. ASTM D 1667- Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Vinyl Chloride Polymers
and Copolymers (Closed-Cell Foam); 1997.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, substrate preparation,
limitations, color availability, and emissions of Volatile Organic Compounds.
C. Samples: Submit two samples, 2 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
E. Materials compatibilty and adhesion testing data for all substrates, including adhesion, chemical
reaction, and staining or bleeding.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780-Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective interior work and product within a five year period after Date of Substantial
Completion.
C. Correct defective work or product at exterior envelope enclosure for a period of 10 years after
the date of Substatial Completion.
D. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight
seal and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, excessive chalking or cracking, or
do not cure.
August 21, 2013 JOINT SEALERS 079005- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Silicone Sealants:
1. Dow Corning Corp.
2. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Polyurethane Sealants:
1. Bostik.
2. Degussa.
3. Sika.
4. Tremco
5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
C. Acrylic Sealants:
1. Degussa-Sonneborn
2. Tremco
3. DAP (800-327-3339).
4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 SEALANTS
A. Type 1 - Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; single or multi-
component.
1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.
B. Type 2-Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, single component, paintable.
1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.
c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.
C. Type 3- Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses I, M and A; single component,
mildew resistant.
1. Applications: Use for:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces.
b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces.
D. Type 4 - Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Class 25, Uses T, I, M and A;
multi-component.
1. Color: Match adjacent material.
E. Type 5 - Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses NT, A, G, M, 0;
single component, neutral curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding;
ultra low modulus.
1. Color: Color as selected.
2. Product: 790 manufactured by Dow Corning.
F. Type 6 - Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920 Type S; Grade NS, Class 50; Use NT; single
component; neutral cure; non-bleeding; non-staining.
1. Color: Color as selected
2. Product: 795 manufactured by Dow Corning.
G. Type 7 -Acoustic Sealant
1. Color: white
2. Products
a. Quiet Solutions; "Quiet Seal"
b. USG: "Sheetrock Acoustic Sealant"
c. Owens Corning: "Quiet Zone Acoustic Sealant"
2-079005 JOINT SEALERS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;
compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Backing: Round soft foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC;
oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work; application of sealant materials
constitutes acceptance of joint surfaces as suitable to receive sealant.
B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Apply sealants to dry surfaces only.
2. Remove lacquers and protective films from metal surfaces.
C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193.
D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of
surfaces and material installation instructions.
1. Mix sealant materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions; apply sealant
before weatherproofing materials are applied.
2. Do not apply sealant until mockup applications are approved.
B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.
C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C 919.
D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve the following, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Width/depth ratio of 2:1.
2. Neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width.
3. Surface bond area on each side not less than 75 percent of joint width.
E. Provide joint backer where ever possible, Install bond breaker where joint backing is not
possible. Under no circumstances allow three point adhesion of sealants.
F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when
sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
H. Tool joints concave.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect sealants until cured.
3.06 SCHEDULE
A. Joints at Metal to Glass-Type 6.
August 21, 2013 JOINT SEALERS 079005 -3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. Joints at aluminum storefront and/or curtain wall -Type 6.
C. Miscellaneous joints where joint will be painted -Type 1.
D. Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealant Type is Indicated: Type 6; colors as selected.
E. Lap Joints in Exterior Sheet Metal Work: Type 6.
F. Under Exterior Door Thresholds: Type 6.
G. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealant is Indicated: Type 2; colors as selected.
H. Installation joints and setting beds for plumbing fixtures: Type 3
I. Control and Expansion Joints in Interior Concrete Slabs and Floors: Type 4.
J. At joints that are to be painted do NOT use silicone sealants.
END OF SECTION
4- 079005 JOINT SEALERS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 081100
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Steel frames
B. Accessories, including louvers and silencers, astragals, and spreaders.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 087100 - Door Hardware.
B. Section 099000 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 -American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council; 1998.
B. ANSI A250.10 -Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for
Steel Doors and Frames; 1998.
C. DHI A115 Series-Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door
and Hardware Institute; current edition (ANSI/DHI A115 Series).
D. NAAMM HMMA 840- Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National
Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 1987.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,
reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, finishes. .
C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and
identifying location of different finishes, if any.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND PROTECTION
A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.
B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Frames:
1. Republic Builders Products.
2. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.
3. Stiles Custom Metal.
4. Currier.
5. Timely(KD Frames only)
6. Substitutions: See Section 01600- Product Requirements.
2.02 FRAMES
A. Requirements for All Frames:
1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1.
2. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with DHI A115 Series, with reinforcement welded in
place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.
August 21, 2013 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081100 - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated
(galvannealed), A60/ZF180.
4. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
B. Insultation: U-0.70
2.03 STEEL FRAMES
A. General:
1. Frames: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 1, 16 gage
2. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
3. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head,
flush with top.
2.04 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM
HMMA 840.
B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
C. Coordinate installation of hardware.
3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.
B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION
2 - 081100 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 083323
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Overhead coiling doors , operating hardware, non-fire-rated and exterior, electric operation.
B. Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications : Support framing.
B. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish.
C. Section 262717 - Equipment Wiring: Power to disconnect.
D. Section 260534 - Conduit: Conduit from electric circuit to operator and from operator to control
station.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
B. ASTM A123/A123M- Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2012.
C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2008.
E. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays,
Rated 600 2000 Volts; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000(R2005).
F. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details, electrical
equipment, finish and warranty.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and
installation details.
D. Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency, periodic adjustments
required, and local service provider.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to the
authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Overhead Coiling Doors:
1. Cornell Iron Works, Inc: www.cornelliron.com.
2. The Cookson Company: www.cooksondoor.com.
3. Wayne-Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation: www.wayne-dalton.com.
B. Insultation: U-0.50
2.02 COILING DOORS
A. Exterior Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain.
August 21, 2013 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1. Capable of withstanding positive and negative wind loads of 20 psf, without undue
deflection or damage to components.
2. Sandwich slat construction with insulated core of rigid type insulation; insulation (u-)value:
.125
3. Nominal Slat Size: 2 inches wide x required length.
4. Finish: Galvanized.
5. Guides: Angles; galvanized steel minimum 3/16 inch thick.
6. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel.
7. Electric operation.
8. Mounting: Surface mounted.
B. Insultation: U-0.50
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Curtain Construction: Interlocking slats.
1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to
prevent lateral movement.
2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed
position.
3. Weatherstripping: Moisture and rot proof, resilient type, located at jamb edges, bottom of
curtain, and where curtain enters hood enclosure of exterior doors.
B. Steel Slats: Minimum 22 gage ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet.
1. Galvanizing: Minimum G90/Z275 coating.
C. Steel Guides: ASTM A36/A36M steel angles, size as indicated, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A
123/A 123M.
D. Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape.
1. Minimum 24 gage.
2. Prime paint.
E. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing
torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding
position at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb nominal force to operate.
2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATION
A. Electric Operators:
1. Mounting: Side mounted.
2. Motor Enclosure:
a. Exterior doors: NEMA MG 1 Type 4; open drip proof.
3. Motor Rating: 1/2 hp; continuous duty.
4. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter.
5. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1.
6. Opening Speed: 12 inches per second.
7. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller.
8. Manual override in case of power failure.
B. Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE) momentary control for each
operator.
1. 24 volt circuit.
C. Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro-mechanical sensitized type, wired
to stop operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered.
D. Safety Beam: Provide photo eletric beam to automatically stop decent of door when beam is
broken.
2 - 083323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing
without distortion or stress.
C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural
members only.
D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.
E. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 262717.
F. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch.
C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch.
D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean installed components.
B. Remove labels and visible markings.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323- 3
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 084229
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Automatic sliding doors, with frames.
B. Operators for doors provided in other sections.
C. Actuators and safety devices.
D. Handrails adjacent to doors..
E. Maintenance.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 262717 - Equipment Wiring.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. BHMA A156.10 -American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors; Builders
Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2011 (ANSI/BHMA A156.10).
B. BHMA A156.19 -American National Standard for Power Assist and Low Energy Power
Operated Doors; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2007 (ANSI/BHMA A156.19).
C. 2010 Oregon Structural Specialty Code
D. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
E. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements.
F. UL (ECMD)- Electrical Construction Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
edition.
G. UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate layout and dimensions; head,jamb, and sill conditions; elevations; components,
anchorage, recesses, materials, and finishes, electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
2. Identify installation tolerances required, assembly conditions, routing of service lines and
conduit, and locations of operating components and boxes.
C. Product Data: Provide data on system components, sizes, features, and finishes.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions
requiring special attention, and manufacturer's hardware and component templates.
E. Maintenance Contract.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, and
conduit.
G. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for each type
of hardware and operating component.
H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
August 21, 2013 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
2. Wrenches and other tools required for maintenance of equipment.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UnderwritersLaboratories
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 10 years of experience.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. See Section 017800- Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion
C. Provide two year manufacturer warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Automatic Entrance Doors:
1. Record
2. Hunter
3. Tormax
4. Besam Entrance Solutions (Sliding): www.besam-usa.com.
5. Horton Automatics: www.hortondoors.com.
6. Gyro Tech NABCO Entrances Inc: www.nabcoentrances.com.
7. Stanley: www.stanleydoors.com
8. Substitutions: To be considered based on comparible quality, cost and project lead time.
B. Swinging Automatic Entrance Door Assemblies:
2.02 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
A. Automatic Sliding Door: Single leaf track-mounted, electric operation, extruded aluminum
glazed door,with frame, and operator concealed overhead.
1. Operation: Power open, power close operation.
2. Actuator(s): As indicated on drawings.
3. "Outside" Side Actuator: Motion Sensor, Proximity detector.
4. "Inside" Side Actuator: Motion sensor, Proximity detector.
5. Hold Open: Toggle switch at inside head of doors.
6. Door and Frame Finish: Same as adjacent framing system.
7. Door and Frame Finish: Anodized, natural.
8. Entrance: 6'W by 7' H.
2.03 DOOR OPERATORS
A. Door Operators - General Requirements: Comply with BHMA A156.10, BHMA A156.19, and UL
325, as applicable.
1. Select equipment to accommodate heavy pedestrian traffic and weight of doors.
2. Provide equipment capable of operating, holding open, and closing doors under positive
and negative wind pressures calculated in accordance with applicable code.
3. Operating Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 140 degrees F ambient.
4. Provide operators that are fully adjustable for opening and closing speeds,checking
speeds, and hold-open time.
5. Swinging Door Operators: Provide for manual open and close operation of door leaves in
the event of power failure.
6. Sliding Door Operators: Provide for manual open, close, and break-away operation of
door leaves in the event of power failure. Maximum Force for Break-Away Function: 6 lbf.
2 - 084229 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
7. Conform to applicable code for automatic release of control drive unit to permit manual
opening of doors.
8. Finish exposed components to match door and door hardware finish.
9. Electric Operators: 1/4 hp minimum, self-contained, chain driven, with release clutch.
10. Pneumatic/Hydraulic Operators: Low voltage control system, pneumatic activation to
hydraulic device for opening and closing.
B. Door Operator: Electric; Surface mounted overhead, concealed.
1. Operation: Power open, power boost, power close operation.
2. Constant speed control for opening and closing cycles.
3. Actuator(s): As indicated on drawings.
4. "Push" Side Actuator: Motion sensor, proximity detector.
5. "Pull" Side Actuator: Motion sensor, proximity detector.
6. "Pull" Side Safety: Door-mounted.
7. Hold Open: Toggle switch at head; deactivate hold-open on activation of fire alarm
system.
2.04 ACTUATORS
A. Proximity Detector Actuator: Microwave; distance of control sensitivity adjustable.
2.05 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. Electrical Characteristics:
1. 1/4 hp.
2. 5 rated load amperes.
3. 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz.
B. Motors: NEMA MG 1.
C. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes,
and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
D. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch in control panel.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Steel Clips, Supports, and Steel Anchors: Galvanized to 1.25 ounces per square foot.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings.
B. Verify that electric power is available and is of the correct characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction of door and frame units and live and dead loads
that may be transmitted to operating equipment.
C. Provide for dimensional distortion of components during operation.
D. Install pneumatic lines and door power units in a manner to prevent condensation or freezing.
E. Coordinate installation of components with related and adjacent work; level and plumb.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door equipment for correct function and smooth operation.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protection, clean exposed surfaces.
August 21, 2013 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 084229- 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Demonstrate operation, operating components, adjustment features, and lubrication
requirements.
3.06 MAINTENANCE
A. See Section 017000 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to
maintenance service.
B. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.
C. Provide service and maintenance of operating equipment for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion, at no extra charge to Owner.
END OF SECTION
4- 084229 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 084313
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass.
B. Aluminum doors.
C. Weatherstripping.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 079005-Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware
C. Section 088000 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA CW-10- Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
B. AAMA 503 Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls and
Sloped Glazing Systems;American Architectural Manufacturers Association.
C. AAMA 611 Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum
D. AAMA 2603-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
E. AAMA 2604-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
F. AAMA 2605-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
G. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
H. ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2012.
I. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012.
J. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012.
K. ASTM C 794- Standard Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
L. ASTM C 1184 - Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants.
M. ASTM E 283- Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen.
N. ASTM E 330- Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
O. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).
P. SSPC-Paint 20-Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings;2002 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or
permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design
wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.
August 21, 2013 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 084313- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of Oregon Structural Specialy code,
Current Edition.
2. Member Deflection:
3. Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of
glazing materials.
4. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6
inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or
an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is
less.
5. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces
glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge
clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than
1/8 inch.
6. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, limit deflection
to two times the length of cantilevered member, divided by 175.
7. Engineering of the system shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All structural
calculations and drawings shall be prepared and stamped by an engineer registered in the
State of Oregon.
8. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and
deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.
B. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
C. Seismic Drift Causing Glass Fallout: Complying with criteria for passing based on building
occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.6 at design displacement and 1.5 times
the design displacement.
D. Vertical Interstory Movement: Complying with criteria for passing based on building occupancy
type when tested according to AAMA 501.7 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design
displacement.
1. Thermal Performance of Storefront System:
a. Calculate U-Values in accordance with NFRC 100.
b. Provide overall system U-Value of.42 or better.
2. Air Infiltration:
E. Limit air infiltration through fixed framing and glass assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,
measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.576.24 psf as measured in
accordance with ASTM E 283.
F. Limit air infiltration through entrance door assemblies to 1.00 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,
measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in
accordance with ASTM E 283.
1. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test
pressure difference of 8.00 lbf/sq ft.
2. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any
water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture
occurring within system.
3. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components
caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without
causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building
elements.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,
anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details.
2 - 084313 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,
affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding
required. Show interface with adjacent systems.
D. Embed drawings and calculations:
1. Drawings and calculations are both due in one package within 2 weeks of notice to
proceed.
2. AutoCAD files may be obtained from architect's office.
3. Submittal to comply with all other submittal requirements listed in this section.
4. Submittal to include the following information at a minimum:
a. Drawings:
1) Location of all embeds needed from gridlines.
2) Minimum size of embeds needed for subcontractor's system.
3) Type of embed at each location (flat, vertical, studs welded, bolted, etc.).
4) Adjustability required (vertical, horizontal, etc.).
5) Loading needed for embeds, including eccentricities, shear, bearing, moment,
combination, etc.
6) Metal thickness, alloy, temper and finish.
7) Glass thickness, strength, tint, coating, opacifier, frit and safety backing.
8) Glazing materials identification.
9) Fastener alloy, strength, finish, diameter, length and spacing.
10) Joinery and internal seals. Secondary water and condensation control.
11) Sealant identification by product name and manufacturer.
12) Dimensioned position of glass edge relative to metal.
13) Relationship to the work of others shall be clearly indicated when necessary to
coordinate the Work of this Section with other building trades.
14) All details for operable vents/doors/windows identifying the materials and temper
for frames, hardware and gaskets as well as the location of the fastening points,
handles, and locking system.
15) Interfacing details with perimeter condition work to include fixing and perimeter
sealant details including methods used to terminate and seal off the panelized
exterior wall system.
16) Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
barriers.
17) Calculations:
(a) Submit structural calculations, with first submission of shop drawings,
prepared in compliance with referenced documents and these
specifications. Calculations shall be legible and shall incorporate sufficient
cross-references to shop drawings to make calculations readily
understandable and reviewable. Test reports are not an acceptable
substitute for calculations. Calculations shall include, but not be limited to:
(b) All loading requirements.
(c) Analysis of framing members.
(d) Analysis of anchors, including anchors embedded in concrete.
(e) Section property computations for framing members.
(f) Analysis of stress in structural silicone.
(g) Seal and signature of professional engineer registered in the State of
Oregon
(h) Calculations required for permit of embeds.
(i) Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
5. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering
calculations, dimensional limitations.
August 21, 2013 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 084313- 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
6. Samples: Submit two samples 12 inches long in size illustrating finished aluminum
surface, glass, glazing materials.
7. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified
requirements.
8. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
9. Preconstruction Sealant Test Reports: Compatibility and adhesion test reports from
sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant
backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with sealants; include sealant
manufacturer's interpretation of test results for sealant performance and recommendations
for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct supervision
of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at
Oregon.
B. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum
glazing systems with minimum five years of experience.
1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed
coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.
C. Coordinate disposal of packing materials with Waste Management Plan.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate the work with installation of firestopping components or materials.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 017800-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide 10(ten)year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass
units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.
D. Provide 10 (ten)year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.
Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
E. Provide 510 (ten)year warranty that system will maintain air and water infiltration performance
criteria.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Kawneer North America; Product 451T Trifab:www.kawneer.com.
2. United States Aluminum Corp; Product IT 451:www.usalum.com.
3. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope; Product 3000 Thermal Multi-plane: www.oldcastlebe.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 016000-Product Requirements.
2.02 STOREFRONT
A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members
with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
1. Glazing Position: Front-set.
2. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep.
3. Water Leakage Test Pressure Differential: 8.0 lbf/sq ft.
4. Air Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 1.57 psf.
4-084313 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum:
B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles and Tubes:ASTM B 221; alloy: 6065, temper: T5.
C. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
D. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
E. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
1. Structural Steel Sections:
F. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36; galvanized in accordance with requirements
of ASTM A 123.
G. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
H. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
1. Glass: As specified in Section 088000.
2. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich.
2.04 FINISHES
A. High Performance Organic Finish: AAMA 26054; 3 coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer system
containing not less than 50 percent PVDF or FEVE resin by weight in both color coat and clear
topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating
and resin manufacturers'written instructions; color as selected from manufacturer's standard
colors.
B. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.
2.05 HARDWARE
A. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 087100.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar
metals with bituminous paint.
E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.
G. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.
1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in
completed assemblies, including joint edges.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor barrier materials are ready to receive work
of this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances,
building movement and other irregularities.
C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
August 21, 2013 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 084313- 5
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
E. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
F. Rigidly secure non-movement joints.
G. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
H. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
I. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.
J. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200
"Joint Sealants"to produce weathertight installation.
K. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads
to sill flashing.
L. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
M. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of
thermal barrier.
N. Install hardware using templates provided.
1. See Section 087100 for hardware installation requirements.
2. Install glass in accordance with Section 088000, using glazing method required to achieve
performance criteria.
3. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft,
whichever is less.
B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of
aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.
C. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 783 at 1.5 times the rate and static-air-pressure differential specified for
laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements"Article.
D. Test Area: One bay wide by one story of glazed aluminum storefront.
E. Perform tests in each test area as directed by Architect.
1. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested according to AAMA 503 modified, (No pressure
reduction allowed)applying same test pressures listed under"Performance
Requirements". No water penetration allowed.
F. Test Area: One bay wide by one story of glazed aluminum storefront.
G. Perform tests in each test area as directed by Architect.
H. Modify"uncontrolled water"such that uncontrolled water is defined as water penetrating the
system or appearing on any interior surface from sources other than condensation.
I. Modify controlled water penetration such that acceptable controlled water penetration is defined
as water that is contained in an area with provisions to drain back to the exterior. For purposes
of testing, water that penetrates past the primary seal and is collected in an area that is
designed primarily as a condensation gutter is considered water leakage/penetration.
6- 084313 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
J. Any failure will result in retesting of the failed condition after repairs are completed as well as
performing two (2) additional tests at locations resembling similar construction.
K. Retests and additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
1. Test sealants in place for adhesion, using methods and frequency recommended by
sealant manufacturer. Promptly replace any sealant which does not adhere or fails to
cure.
L. For any sealant testing failure perform two (2) additional tests from same batch of material or
sequence of works.
M. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass
tests and inspections.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean
wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.
B. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 084313- 7
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 086200
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preformed plastic skylights with integral metal frame. Owner provided and contractor installed.
B. Integral insulated curb. Owner provided and contractor installed.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 061000- Rough Carpentry: Wood framing for rough opening.
B. Section 07 5400-Thermoplastics Membrane Roofing: Roofing system patching and base
flashing at skylight curb.
C. Section 076200-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Skylight counterflashing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM B209- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010.
B. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric]; 2010.
C. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012.
D. ASTM B221 M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Allow for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a cycling surface
temperature range of 170 degrees F without causing detrimental effects to system or
components.
B. Design to withstand live loads as calculated in accordance with local code.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide structural, thermal, and daylighting performance values.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configurations, dimensions, locations, fastening methods, and
installation details.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum 5 years documented experience.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 017800- Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for including leakage due to defective skylight materials
or workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Unit Skylights:
1. Sunoptics: www.sunoptics.com
a. Fixture:
1) SIG Signature Series 2020
2) SIG Signature Series 5050
b. Glazing: TGZ Triple Glaze
August 21, 2013 UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086200 - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
c. Lens Material:
1) CC2CL1 Acrylic Class 1
2) CC2CL3 Acrylic Class 3
d. Len Color: LENSCLWHCL Clear White Clear(Triple Glaze Default)
2. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
A. Skylights: Factory-assembled glazing in aluminum frame, free of visual distortion, weathertight.
1. Shape: Square dome.
2. Glazing: Single.
3. Operation: Operable for ventilation.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A. Single Glazing: Low emissivity glass; clear transparent.
B. Unit Skylight : Factory-assembled glazing in aluminum frame; double dome .
1. Rectangular domed shape.
2. Nominal Size: As indicated on drawings.
C. Double Glazing: Acrylic plastic; factory sealed.
1. Outer Glazing: Clear transparent.
2. Inner Glazing: White translucent.
3. Average air space of 1/2 inch minimum
D. Frames: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M) Extruded aluminum thermally broken, reinforced and
welded corner joints, integral curb frame mounting flange and counterflashing to receive roofing
flashing system, with integral condensation collection gutter, glazing retainer; clear anodized
finish.
E. Support Curbs: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) Sheet aluminum, sandwich construction; 1 inch
thick, 4 inches high; glass fiber insulation; with integral flange for anchorage to roof deck.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate free of visual distortion and defects.
B. Fabricate to achieve leakproof, weathertight assembly.
C. Fabricate components to allow for expansion and contraction with minimum clearance and shim
spacing around perimeter of assembly.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that openings and substrate conditions are ready to receive work of this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install aluminum curb assembly, fastening securely to roof decking. Flash curb assembly into
roof system.
B. Place skylight units and secure to curb assembly. Install counterflashing as required.
C. Apply sealant to achieve watertight assembly.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces.
B. Wash down exposed surfaces; wipe surfaces clean.
C. Remove excess sealant.
END OF SECTION
2-086200 UNIT SKYLIGHTS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 086223
TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tubular skylights, consisting of skylight dome, reflective tube, and diffuser assembly;
configuration as indicated on the drawings.
B. Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 073113 -Asphalt Shingles: Flashing-in of skylight base.
B. Section 075100 - Built-Up Bituminous Roofing: Flashing-in of skylight base.
C. Section 075300 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Flashing-in of skylight base.
D. Section 075200 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing: Flashing-in of skylight base.
E. Section 086200- Unit Skylights: Skylights without reflective tube.
F. Section 086300- Metal-Framed Skylights.
G. Section 262717- Equipment Wiring: Electrical connections.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.04 PERFORMACE REQUIREMENTS
A. Completed tubular daylighting device assemblies shall be capable of meeting the following
performance requirements:
1. Air Infiltration Test:Air infiltration will not exceed 0.30 cfm/sf aperture with a pressure delta
of 1.57 psf across the tube when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.
2. Water Resistance Test: No uncontrolled water leakage at 10.5 psf pressure differential
with water rate of 5 gallons/hour/sf when tested in accordance with ASTM E 547.
3. Uniform Load Test:
a. No breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or damage to make
daylighting system inoperable or cause excessive permanent deflection of any section
when tested at a Positive Load of 150 psf(7.18 kPa)or Negative Load of 70 psf(3.35
kPa).
b. All units shall be tested with a safety factor of(3) for positive pressure and (2)for
negative pressure, acting normal to plane of roof in accordance with ASTM E 330.
4. Fire Testing:
a. When used with the Dome Edge Protection Band, all domes meet fire rating
requirements as described in the 2006 International Building Code.
b. Self-Ignition Temperature -Greater than 650 degrees F per ASTM D-1929.
c. Smoke Density- Rating no greater than 450 per ASTM Standard E 84 in way
intended for use. Classification C.
d. Rate of Burn and/or Extent- Maximum Burning Rate: 2.5 inches/min (62 mm/min)
Classification CC-2 per ASTM D 635.
e. Rate of Burn and/or Extent- Maximum Burn Extent: 1 inch (25 mm) Classification
CC-1 per ASTM D 635.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
August 21, 2013 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS 086223- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
C. Shop Drawings. Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components,
including anchorage, flashings and accessories.
D. Electrical wiring diagrams for connection of LED fixtures.
E. Verification Samples: As requested by Architect.
F. Test Reports: Independent testing agency reports verifying compliance with specified
performance requirements.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engaged in manufacture of tubular skylights for minimum of 20
years.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 017800 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Daylighting Device: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 10 years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Solatube International, Inc: www.solatube.com.
1. Solatube International, Inc., which is located at: 2210 Oak Ridge Way ; Vista, CA 92081; Toll
Free Tel: 888-765-2882; Tel: 760-477-1120; Fax: 760-597-4488 ; Email: request info
(commsales @solatube.com); Web: www.solatube.com
B. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
A. Tubular Skylights: Transparent roof-mounted skylight dome and curb, reflective tube, and
ceiling level diffuser assembly, transferring sunlight to interior spaces.
B. SolaMaster Series: Solatube Model 330 DS-C Penetrating Ceiling, 21 inch (530 mm)
Daylighting System:
1. Roof Dome Assembly: Transparent, UV and impact resistant dome with flashing base
supporting dome and top of tube.
a. Glazing: Type DA, 0.143 inch (3.7 mm) minimum thickness injection molded acrylic
classified as CC2 material; UV inhibiting (100 percent UV C, 100 percent UV B and
98.5 percent UV A), impact modified acrylic blend.
2. LightTracker Reflector, made of aluminum sheet, thickness 0.015 inch (0.4 mm)with
Spectralight Infinity. Positioned in the dome to capture low angle sunlight.
3. Roof Flashing Base:
a. Two Piece: Two-piece, inverted flange Metal Roof Flashing for Standing Seam Rib
roof profile with greater than 14-3/8 inch (365 mm) minimum distance between ribs
permitting a required greater than 2 inch (51 mm) clearance between flashing and rib:
Type FSM. Aluminum 1060 Alloy, corrosion resistant conforming to ASTM B 209,
0.059 inch (1.5 mm)thick.
1) Base Style: Type F11, Self mounted, 11 inches (279 mm) high.
2 - 086223 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
4. Dome Edge Protection Band: Type PB, For fire rated roofs with turret height less than 8
inches (203 mm). Galvanized steel. Nominal thickness of 0.039 inch (1 mm).
5. Flashing Insulator: Type FI, Thermal isolation material is for use under the following
flashing types; Type F11.
6. Tube Ring: Attached to top of base section; 0.090 inch (2.3 mm) nominal thickness
injection molded high impact PVC; to prevent thermal bridging between base flashing and
tubing and channel condensed moisture out of tubing.
7. Dome Seal: Adhesive backed weatherstrip 0.63 inch (16 mm)tall by 0.28 inch (7 mm).
8. Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Penetrating Ceilings: Solatube Model 330 DS-C. Ceiling
mounted box transitioning from round tube to square ceiling assembly, supporting light
transmitting surface at bottom termination of tube 23.8 inches by 23.8 inches (605 mm by
605 mm) square frame to fit standard suspended ceiling grids or hard ceilings.
a. Round to square transition box made of opaque polymeric material, classified as
CC2, Class C, 0.110 inch (2.8 mm)thick.
b. Lens: Type L1 OptiView Fresnel lens design to maximize light output and diffusion
with extruded aluminum frame and EPDM foam seal to minimize condensation and
bug, dirt and air infiltration per ASTM E 283. Visible Light Transmission shall be
greater than 90 percent at 0.022 inch (0.6 mm)thick. Classified as CC2.
c. Supplemental Natural Effect Lens made of acrylic, classified as CC2, Class C, 0.060
inch (1.5 mm)thick, with open cell foam seal to minimize condensation and bug, dirt
and air infiltration per ASTM E 283.
d. Secondary Diffuser: Type SS, Acrylic plastic classified as CC2 material. Thickness
shall not be less than 0.100 inches.
9. Accessories:
a. Security Kit: Type SK Dome Security Kit, rivets with nylon spacers to replace dome
screws.
b. Wire Suspension Kit: Type E, Use the wire suspension kit when additional bracing to
the structure is required.
10. Catalog Number: S330 DS-C-DA-PB-SK-SS-FSM-E-L1-LN
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened, non-magnetic steel, non-corrosive metal of
type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon.
B. Suspension Wire: Steel, annealed, galvanized finish, size and type for application and ceiling
system requirement.
C. Sealant: Polyurethane or copolymer based elastomeric sealant as provided or recommended by
manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Coordinate requirements for power supply, conduit and wiring.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
August 21, 2013 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS 086223- 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. After installation of first unit, field test to determine adequacy of installation. Conduct water test
in presence of Owner, Architect, or Contractor, or their designated representative. Correct if
needed before proceeding with installation of subsequent units.
C. Inspect installation to verify secure and proper mounting. Test each fixture to verify operation,
control functions, and performance. Correct deficiencies.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
•
4 - 086223 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART I -GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. SECTION INCLUDES
1. The work in this section includes furnishing all items of finish hardware as hereinafter
specified or obviously necessary for all swinging, sliding, folding and other doors. Except
items, which are specifically excluded from this section of the specification or of unique
hardware, specified in the same sections as the doors and frames on which they are
installed.
B. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. Related documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section.
C. RELATED SECTIONS
1. 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry
2. 06 48 16 - Interior Wood Door Frames
3. 08 01 00 - Operations and Maintenance
4. 08 06 71 - Door Hardware Schedule
5. 08 11 13 - Metal Doors and Frames
6. 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors
7. 08 14 23 - Clad Wood Doors
8. 08 41 00 - Entrances and Storefronts
9. 28 13 00 -Access Control
1.02 REFERENCES
A. STANDARDS
1. AIA A201 1997- General Conditions of the Contract
2. ANSI-A250.4-Steel Doors and Frames Physical Endurance
3. ANSI A156.1 -Butts and Hinges
4. ANSI A156.2-Bored Locks and Latches
5. ANSI A156.3-Exit Devices
6. ANSI A156.4-Door Controls - Door Closers
7. ANSI A156.5-Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products
8. ANSI A156.6-Architectural Door Trim
9. ANSI A156.7-Template Hinge Dimensions
10. ANSI A156.8- Door Controls - Overhead Holders
11. ANSI A156.13 - Mortise Locks and Latches
12. ANSI A156.15 - Closer Holder Release Devices
13. ANSI A156.16-Auxiliary Hardware
14. ANSI A156.18- Material and Finishes
15. ANSI A156.26- Continuous Hinges
16. UL10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
B. CODES
1. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
2. IBC 2006- International Building Code
3. ANSI A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities
4. ADA-Americans with Disabilities Act
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Submit copies of finish hardware schedule in accordance with Division 1, General
Requirements.
August 21, 2013 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. SCHEDULES AND PRODUCT DATA
1. Schedules to be in vertical format, listing each door opening, and organized into"hardware
sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door opening to
function as intended. Hardware schedule shall be submitted within two (2)weeks from
date the purchase order is received by the finish hardware supplier. Furnish four(4) copies
of revised schedules after approval for field and file use. Note any special mounting
instructions or requirements with the hardware schedule. Schedules to include the
following information:
a. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings, both on
floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
b. Handing and degree of swing of each door.
c. Door and frame sizes and materials.
d. Keying information.
e. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.
f. Elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic openings.
g. Name and manufacturer of each hardware item.
h. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
i. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedule
j. Mounting locations for hardware when varies from standard.
2. Submit catalog cuts and/or product data sheets for all scheduled finish hardware.
3. Submit separate detailed keying schedule for approval indicating clearly how the owner's
final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
C. SAMPLES
1. Upon request, samples of each type of hardware in finish indicated shall be submitted.
Samples are to remain undamaged and in working condition through submittal and review
process. Items will be returned to the supplier or incorporated into the work within
limitations of keying coordination requirements.
D. TEMPLATES
1. Furnish a complete list and suitable templates, together with finish hardware schedule to
contractor, for distribution to necessary trades supplying materials to be prepped for finish
hardware.
E. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1. Upon completion of construction and building turnover, furnish two (2)complete
maintenance manuals to the owner. Manuals to include the following items:
a. Approved hardware schedule, catalog cuts and keying schedule.
b. Hardware installation and adjustment instructions.
c. Manufacturer's written warranty information.
d. Wiring diagrams, elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic
openings.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. SUBSTITUTIONS
1. All substitution requests must be submitted before bidding and within the procedures and
time frame as outlined in Division 1, General Requirements. Approval of products is at the
discretion of the architect and his hardware consultant.
B. SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS
1. A recognized architectural door hardware supplier who has maintained an office and has
been furnishing hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of at least two (2)years.
Hardware supplier shall have office and warehouse facilities to accommodate this project
and must be an authorized factory distributor of all products specified herein. Hardware
supplier shall have in his employment at least one (1)Architectural Hardware Consultant
(AHC)who is available at reasonable times during business hours for consultation about
the project's hardware and requirements to the owner, architect and contractor.
2 -087100 DOOR HARDWARE August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1.05 FIRE-RATED OPENINGS
A. Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that comply with NFPA 80 and requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed by
Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)or Warnock Hersey(WH)for use on types and sizes of doors
indicated.
B. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and
S-label requirements. Specifications must be cross-referenced and coordinated with door
manufacturers to ensure that total opening engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for
Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1. Hardware required for fire doors shall be listed with Underwriters Laboratories for ratings
specified.
2. Certification(s)of compliance shall be made available upon request by the Authority
Having Jurisdiction.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. MARKING AND PACKAGING
1. Properly package and mark items according to the approved hardware schedule, complete
with necessary screws and accessories, instructions and installation templates for spotting
mortising tools. Contractor shall check deliveries against accepted list and provide receipt
for them, after which he is responsible for storage and care. Any shortage or damaged
good shall be made without cost to the owner.
2. Packaging of door hardware is the responsibility of the supplier. As hardware supplier
receives material from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly
marked with appropriate hardware set and door numbers to match the approved hardware
schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container.
B. DELIVERY
1. The supplier shall deliver all hardware to the project site; direct factory shipments are not
allowed unless agreed upon beforehand. Hardware supplier shall coordinate delivery times
and schedules with the contractor. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of
hardware supplier and hardware installer/contractor until each is satisfied that count is
correct.
2. No keys, other than construction master keys and/or temporary keys are to be packed in
boxes with the locks.
C. STORAGE
1. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed.
Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so
that completion of work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after
installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. All items, except as noted below, shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against
failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one (1)year
commencing on the date of final completion and acceptance. In the event of product failure,
promptly repair or replace item with no additional cost to the owner.
1. Cylindrical locksets - Heavy Duty: Seven (7) years
2. Exit Devices: Five (5) years
3. Door closers: Ten (10) years
4. Securitron (and approved equals) electrified hardware: Unlimited Lifetime
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Only manufacturers as listed below shall be accepted. Obtain each type of finish hardware
(hinges, latch and locksets, exit devices, door closers, etc.)from a single manufacturer.
August 21, 2013 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
2.02 MATERIALS
A. SCREWS AND FASTENERS
1. All required screws shall be supplied as necessary for securing finish hardware in the
appropriate manner. Thru-bolts shall be supplied for exit devices and door closers where
required by code and the appropriate blocking or reinforcing is not present in the door to
preclude their use.
B. HANGING DEVICES
1. HINGES
a. Hinges shall conform to ANSI A156.1 and have the number of knuckles as specified,
oil-impregnated bearings as specified with NRP (non-removable pin)feature, at all
exterior reverse bevel doors. Unless otherwise scheduled, supply one (1) hinge for
every 30" of door height. Unless otherwise specified, supply hinges 4 1/2" in height on
doors up to 36"and hinges 5" in height on doors over 36"and up to 48" in width;
heavy weight hinges (.180)shall be supplied at all doors where specified.
1) Specified Manufacturer: McKinney
2) Approved Substitutes: Hager, Stanley
2. CONTINUOUS GEARED HINGES
a. All hinges to be non-handed and completely reversible. Hinge line to be available in
concealed flush mount with or without inset, full surface and half surface types as
specified in the hardware sets. All hinges to be made of extruded 6060 T6 aluminum
alloy with polyacetal thrust bearings, anodized after cutouts are made for bearings. All
concealed hinges to be fire-rated for 20, 45 and 90 minutes when incorporated into
proper door and frame labeled installations, without necessitating the use of
fusible-link pins. All concealed hinges to be available in standard, heavy, and extra
heavy duty weights; all full surface and half surface hinges in standard and heavy duty
weights as specified in the hardware sets.All hinges to be factory cut for door size.
1) Specified Manufacturers: McKinney
2) Approved Manufacturers: Pemko, Select
C. FLUSH BOLTS AND ACCESSORIES
1. All manual and automatic flush bolts to be furnished as specified.
a. Specified Manufacturer: Rockwood
b. Approved Substitutes: McKinney, Quality, Trimco
D. CYLINDERS AND KEYING
1. KEYING
a. All locks and cylinders shall be construction master-keyed. All locks and cylinders to
be master-keyed or grandmaster-keyed as directed by the owner. Furnish the
following key amounts:
1) Two (2)change keys per lock
2) Three (3)grand master keys
3) Six (6) master keys per master level
4) Fifteen (15)construction/temporary keys
5) Master keys and all high-security or restricted keyway blanks shall be sealed in
tamper-proof packaged boxes when shipped from the factory. The boxes shall
be shrink wrapped and imprinted to ensure the integrity of the packaging.
2. CYLINDER INSTALLATION
a. The general contractor shall install all construction cylinders/cores, at the time of
hardware installation.
b. When requested by the owner/architect, the general contractor shall remove all
construction cylinders/cores, and install all permanent cylinders/cores. Construction
cylinders/cores are to be returned to the hardware supplier.
E. LOCKSETS
1. CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS - HEAVY DUTY
4- 087100 DOOR HARDWARE August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
a. All locksets shall be ANSI 156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1 Certified. Furnish with standard
2 3/4" backset. Lock housing shall be fabricated of steel zinc dichromate and stainless
steel. Latchbolt shall be brass or stainless steel with a minimum 1/2"throw. Locks
shall be non-handed and fully field reversible.
1) Specified Manufacturer: Yale 5400LN Series
2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin CL3300 Series, Schlage ND Series,
Sargent 10 Line
2. LOCKSET STRIKES
a. Strikes shall be non-handed and available with curved lip, full lip or ASA type strikes
as required. Provide strikes with lip-length required to accommodate jamb and/or trim
detail and projection.
F. AUXILIARY LOCKS
1. NARROW STILE DEADBOLTS
a. Specified Manufacturer: Adams Rite
G. EXIT DEVICES
1. CONVENTIONAL DEVICES- PUSH RAIL
a. All exit devices shall be ANSI A156.3, Grade 1 Certified and shall be listed by
Underwriters Laboratories and bear the UL label for life safety in full compliance with
NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. Mounting rails shall be formed from a solid single piece of
stainless steel, brass or bronze no less than 0.072"thick. Push rails shall be
constructed of 0.062"thick material. Lever trim shall be available in finishes and
designs to match that of the specified locksets.
1) Specified Manufacturer: Yale 7100/7200 Series
2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin ED4000/ED5000 Series, Von Duprin 98
Series, Sargent 80 Series
H. DOOR CLOSERS
1. SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSERS- HEAVY DUTY
a. All door closers shall be ANSI 156.4, Grade 1 Certified. All closers shall have
aluminum alloy bodies, forged steel arms, and separate valves for adjusting
backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50%
increase in spring power. Closers shall be furnished with parallel arms mounting on all
doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to permit
180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. Closers shall not be
installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door
for optimum aesthetics. Provide drop plates or other accessories as required for
proper mounting.
1) Specified Manufacturer: Norton 7500 Series
2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin DC6000, Sargent 1431 Series, Yale 4400
Series, LCN 4040 series.
I. DOOR TRIM AND PROTECTIVE PLATES
1. Kick plates shall be .050 gauges and two (2) inches less than door width on push side and
one (1) inch less than door width on pull side; height as specified in headings. Coordinate
and provide width required where possible conflicting hardware dictates otherwise. Push
plates, pull plates, door pulls and miscellaneous door trim shall be as shown in the
hardware schedule.
a. Approved Substitutes: McKinney, Quality, Trimco
J. DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
1. WALL MOUNTED DOOR STOPS
a. Where a door is indicated on the plans to strike flush against a wall, wall bumpers
shall be provided. Provide convex or concave design as indicated.
1) Specified Manufacturer: Rockwood
2) Approved Substitutes: McKinney, Quality, Trimco
2. OVERHEAD STOPS/HOLDERS
August 21, 2013 DOOR HARDWARE 087100- 5
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
a. Where specified, overhead stops/holders as shown in the hardware sets are to be
provided. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket shall be constructed of extruded bronze
and shock absorber spring shall be of heavy tempered steel. Overhead stops shall be
of non-handed design.
1) Specified Manufacturers: Rixson (series as specified)
2) Approved Substitutes: Sargent (series as specified)
3. MAGNETIC HOLD-OPENS
a. Magnetic door holders shall meet or exceed ANSI A156.15 and be UL listed 228 for
Door Closer and Holders, with or without integral smoke detectors. Holding force shall
be 25 to 40 pounds and shall be fail-safe. Pushpin release that eliminates residual
magnetism shall be standard. Provide magnetic hold-opens with triple-voltage coil that
can receive 12 VDC, 24 VAC/DC, or 120VAC; or coordinate required voltage with
electrical.
1) Specified Manufacturers: Rixson
2) Approved Substitutes: HES, Sargent
K. GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS
1. Provide continuous weatherseal on exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound seals on
interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide intumescent seals as required to
meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Provide only
those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available
from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
2. Provide threshold units not less than 4"wide, formed to accommodate change in floor
elevation where indicated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware and to fit door
frames. All threshold units shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
a. Specified Manufacturers: Pemko
b. Approved Substitutes: McKinney, Reese, Zero
L. SILENCERS
1. Furnish rubber door silencers all hollow metal frames; two (2) per pair and three (3) per
single door frame.
2.03 FINISHES
A. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those
listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18 or traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for
their products.
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness,
and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified
by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
C. Where specified hardware shall have an antimicrobial coating which permanently suppresses
the growth of bacteria, algae, fungus, mold and mildew applied. The finish shall control the
spread and growth of bacteria, mold and mildew and shall be FDA listed for use in medical and
food preparation equipment.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Contractor shall ensure that the building is secured and free from weather elements prior to
installing interior door hardware. Examine hardware before installation to ensure it is free of
defects.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following applicable publications, except as
specifically indicated or required to comply with the governing regulations.
1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames"
by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI.)
2. WDMA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors."
6- 087100 DOOR HARDWARE August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops are to be located.
B. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with best trade practice by an
experienced hardware installer. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work.
C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces
that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and
reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9
Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the
substrates involved.
D. Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the
handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be
delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall comply with AIA A201 1997 section 3.3.1 which reads as follows: "The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the
Contract, unless the contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these
matters."
B. The hardware supplier shall do a final inspection prior to building completion to ensure that all
hardware was correctly installed and is in proper working order.
3.04 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or
function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or
as intended for the application made.
B. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a
space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and
make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating
items as necessary to restore to proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door
control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
C. Instruct owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and
hardware finishes and usage of any electronic devices.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Contractor shall protect all hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a covered and dry
place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any
and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.
3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. The following schedule is furnished for whatever assistance it may afford the Contractor; do not
consider it as entirely inclusive. Should any particular door or item be omitted in any scheduled
hardware heading, provide door or item with hardware same as required for similar purposes.
Hardware supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products as listed in the hardware
heading. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door.
B. Manufacturer's Abbreviations:
1. CR- Corbin Russwin
2. FO - Folger Adams
3. HS - HES
4. MC - McKinney
5. NO - Norton
6. PE- Pemko
7. RO - Rockwood
August 21, 2013 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
8. RX- Rixson
9. SA-Sargent
10. SN -Securitron
11. YA-Yale
SEE HARDWARE GROUPS ON NEXT PAGE
8-087100 DOOR HARDWARE August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 088000
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glass.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 08115 - Steel Door Frames: Glazed borrowed lites.
B. Section 084313 -Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Glazing furnished by storefront manufacturer.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,
Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011).
B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005
C. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass;2011e1.
D. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated
and Uncoated Glass; 2012.
E. ASTM C 1193- Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005a
F. ASTM C 1376-Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat
Glass; 2003
G. ASTM E 773 - Standard Test Methods for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units;
2001.
H. ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units; 1997.
I. ASTM E 1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2004
J. ASTM E2190-Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation;
2010.
K. GANA(GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009.
L. GANA(SM)- GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.
M. CFR 1201 -Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition
N. GANA(SM)- FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 1990
O. SIGMA TM-3000 - Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units; Sealed Insulating
Glass Manufacturers Association; 2004
P. National Fenestration Rating Council Inc. (NFRC).
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable)without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to
the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to
remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B. Select type and thickness of exterior glass to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting
normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with Oregon Structural
Specialty code, current edition..
1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E 1300 to determine glass type and thickness.
2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery
of glazing materials.
3. Thicknesses listed are minimum.
a. Glass and glazing materials shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and
air barrier.
August 21, 2013 GLAZING 088000- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1) To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of air and
vapor seal.
2) Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from
glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.
b. Stress Analysis
1) The glass manufacturer shall perform stress analysis to determine the proper
glass thickness and treatment required to resist the structural and thermal
stresses for each glazing condition (based on the worse case for each
condition).All costs in conjunction with the analysis shall be borne by the
Contractor.
2) Should the stress analysis show that glass of greater strength or thickness is
required over that scheduled, then all such changes shall be incorporated into
the Work. Changes shall be in accordance with unit pricing provided with the
proposal.
3) Submit all documentation to the glass manufacturer as required to obtain glass
manufacturer's stress analysis.
c. Structural Stress Criteria
1) Vertical Glazing: Design glazing to withstand positive and negative wind loads as
indicated on the structural drawings
2) Center Deflection: Maximum deflection shall not exceed U60 or 3/4 inch,
whichever is less.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,
size limitations, special handling or installation requirements, special application requirements
for glazing materials, available colors of glass and glazing materials with color selections.
C. Samples: Submit two samples 12x12 inch in size of glass units.
D. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that all glass meets or exceeds specified requirements.
F. Shop Drawings: Show size and thicknesses of glass, proposed "bites" in frames, sizes and
locations of blocking, spacers, beads, stops and edge treatments. Note quality, type and
strength of each light.
G. Documentation:
1. Submit glass manufacturer's written and graphic analysis demonstrating compliance with
requirements as follows.
a. Indicate the design criteria for each worse case glazing condition.
b. Indicate calculations verifying conformance to thermal and structural criteria for each
worse case glazing condition.
c. For each separate worse case glazing condition, indicate glass thickness, type, and
whether glass is annealed, heat-strengthened, or tempered.
1) Submit coated glass manufacturer's written verification of review and approval of
all glazing details and conditions, including pocket widths, edge bites and edge
stresses, and glass thicknesses.
(a) Submit structural glazing sealant manufacturer's written recommendations
and approvals for structural glazing installations.
2) Warranty: Submit draft of manufacturer's and fabricator's warranty for Architect's
review.
3) Certification: Submit written certification that the exterior structural glazing
system was installed in strict accordance with the written recommendations of
the structural glazing sealant manufacturer.
2 - 088000 GLAZING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing
installation methods.
B. U Values are measured utilizing NFRC (National Fenestration methodology)
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years documented experience.
D. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited
according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
E. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
F. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain tinted float glass, coated float glass, laminated glass, and
insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.
G. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer
for each product and installation method.
H. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's "Glazing
Manual."
2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing,"and AAMA
TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing."
4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing
Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
a. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark
glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate
manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which
glass complies.
b. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on
at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
c. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
d. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1) Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and
avoid delays.
2) Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after
installation.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a ten (10)year warranty to include coverage for seal
failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units. Evidence of failure is
the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
B. Provide a ten (10)year warranty to include coverage for coated glass from deterioration of glass
and coatings (solar control and spandrel frits)due to normal conditions of use including cleaning
which is consistent with manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and replacement of
same. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are
not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to
August 21, 2013 GLAZING 088000 - 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of
deterioration in coating.
C. C.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GLASS MATERIALS
A. Float Glass Manufacturers:
1. Viracon.
2. Guardian Industries Corporation: www.guardian.com.
3. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na.
4. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com <http://www.ppgideascapes.com>.
5. Oldcastle Building Envelope: www.oldcastlebe.com
6. Substitutions: Refer to Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
a. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated.
1) Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3
(glazing select).
2) Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048.
3) Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated.
4) Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified
requirements for wind load design regardless of specified thickness.
b. Clear Float Glass (Type CFG): Clear, annealed.
1) Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3
glazing select.
2) 1/4 inch minimum thick.
c. Clear Safety Glass (Type CSG): Clear; fully tempered with horizontal tempering.
1) 1/4 inch clear tempered glass.
2) Comply with ASTM C 1048, Condition A uncoated, Type I, transparent flat, Class
1, Quality q3 glazing select.
3) Comply with ANSI Z97.1.
d. Unless otherwise approved by the building official, provide manufacturer's label on
each light, indicating type and thickness of glass.
e. Comply with IBC requirements for identification and labeling of safety-glazing
materials in hazardous locations subject to human impact loads.
2.02 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Any of the manufacturers listed under Flat Glass Materials that can meet the specified
criteria and have matching color to the Architect's base sample.
2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
a. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.
1) Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM
E2190.
2) Edge Spacers:Aluminum, filled with dessicant and four bent and soldered
corners and one straight butyl injected zinc plated steel straight key joint.
3) Edge Seal: Dual seal, with polyisobutylene and silicone primary and secondary.
Outer seal shall be compatible with glazing systemGlass to elastomer with
supplementary silicone sealant.
4) Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
5) The minimum thickness of the secondary seal shall be 1/16 inch.
6) The target width of the primary seal shall be 5/32 inch.
7) Gaps or skips between primary and secondary sealant are permitted to a
maximum width of 1/16 inch by maximum length of 2 inches with gaps separated
4- 088000 GLAZING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
by at least 18 inches. Continuous contact between the primary seal and the
secondary seal is desired.
8) Both primary and secondary sealant adhesion shall exhibit continuous, tenacious
adhesion to both glass and spacer contact areas.
9) Units shall be certified for compliance by the IGCC in accordance with the above
ASTM test method.
10) Assembly of insulating units shall be by a fabricator approved by the glass
materials manufacturer
b. Clear Insulated Glass (Type CIG2): Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal.
1) Design standard: Viracon VE1-40; VLT 36%, UVLT 10%, VLR Out 15%, VLR In
19% Solar Ref 25%, U-Value Winter.31, U-Value Summer:.29, SC.32,
SHGC.28.
2) Design Alternate: PPG Solarban 70XL; VLT 64%, UVLT 6%, VLR Out 12%, VLR
In 13% Solar Ref 52%, U-Value Winter.28, U-Value Summer:.26, SC.32,
SHGC.27.
3) Place radiant low E coating on No.2 surface within the unit.
4) Comply with ASTM E2190, Class CBA
5) Total unit thickness of 1 inch.
c. Clear Insulated Safety Glass (Type CISG2): Double pane with glass to elastomer
edge seal.
1) Design standard: Viracon VE1-40; VLT 36%, UVLT 10%, VLR Out 15%, VLR In
19% Solar Ref 25%, U-Value Winter:.31, U-Value Summer:.29, SC.32,
SHGC.28.
2) Design Alternate: PPG Solarban 70XL; VLT 64%, UVLT 6%, VLR Out 12%, VLR
In 13% Solar Ref 52%, U-Value Winter.28, U-Value Summer:.26, SC.32,
SHGC.27.
3) Outer pane of 1/4 inch clear tempered safety glass, inner pane of 1/4 inch clear
tempered safety glass.
4) Place radient low E coating on No.2 surface within the unit.
5) Comply with ASTM E2190, Class CBA.
6) Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
7) Total unit thickness of 1 inch.
2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Blocks: Silicone per glass manufacturer's recommendations, 80 to 90 Shore A
durometer hardness, ASTM C864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or
minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method
and pane weight and area.
B. Spacer Shims: Silicone per glass manufacturer's recommendations, 50 to 60 Shore A
durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the
glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face.
C. Glazing Tape: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam, coiled on release paper over adhesive on two
sides, maximum water absorption by volume of 2 percent, designed for compression of 25
percent to effect an air barrier and vapor retarder seal; as required inch size.
D. Glazing Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain
watertight seal Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM
C864 Option I;
1. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115
2. Color: Black
a. black color.
b. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
c. Safety Glazing Film: 3M Ultra High Performance Safety and Security Window Film -
SCARL 400; Clear(503-593-9292)
August 21, 2013 GLAZING 088000 - 5
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may
impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
C. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets
at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
a. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for
defective installation caused by prior observable conditions.
b. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be
concealed by this Work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so
that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave
visible marks in the completed work.
3.03 GLAZING (GENERAL)
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to
provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances
and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
6 - 088000 GLAZING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in
glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
K. Retain both paragraphs below if glazing with wedge-shaped gaskets is required for Project.
L. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or
gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when
installation is subjected to movement.
M. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
N. Comply with "Glazing Manual" by GANA, except as shown and specified otherwise by
Manufacturers of glass and glazing materials.
O. Perimeter glass clearances within setting frame shall be in accordance with GANA
recommendations, and as required by the glass manufacturer to provide for wind, earthquake
drift, and thermal expansion.
3.04 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge
block no more than 6 inches from corners.
C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to
attain full contact.
D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous
contact.
E. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed
and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at
corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight
seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant
recommended by gasket manufacturer.
F. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and
pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress
gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal
gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
G. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
August 21, 2013 GLAZING 088000 - 7
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged
from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Retain paragraph below to suit Project. Delete if covered in Section 017700 "Closeout
Procedures."
F. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before
date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
1. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
2. Remove labels after Work is complete.
3. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste.
END OF SECTION
8 - 088000 GLAZING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 092116
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal stud wall framing.
B. Metal ceiling framing system.
C. Acoustic insulation.
D. Cementitious backing board.
E. Gypsum wallboard.
F. Joint treatment and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing.
B. Section 061054 -Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking for support of wall-mounted
equipment.
C. Section 072100 -Thermal Insulation: Acoustic insulation.
D. Section 078400 - Firestopping
E. Section 079005-Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant, sealant as joint filler.
F. Section 099000 - Paints and Coatings
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A108.11 -American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer
Units; 2012.1.
B. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing
Gypsum Board; 2002 (Reapproved 2007).
C. ASTM C645- Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 201 la.
D. ASTM C665-Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.
E. ASTM C754 -Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2011.
F. ASTM C840 -Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2011.
G. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel
Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)
in Thickness; 2011.
H. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the
Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs;
2007.
I. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2011.
J. GA-214- Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish; Gypsum Association; 2007.
K. GA-216-Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2010.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Acoustic Attenuation for Interior Partitions Indicated as Acoustic: STC ratings (vary from
assembly to assembly)and are calculated in accordance with ASTM E 413, based on tests
conducted in accordance with ASTM E 90. Refer to the Wall Types Sheet within the drawing for
specific rating requirements. The ratings indicated are minimum lab tested ratings. The
assemblies indicated are intended to exceed the stated minimums.
August 21, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. Structural Performance for Interior Partitions
1. Standard Partitions: Design to resist a minimum lateral load of 5 lbs/sf with a maximum
deflection of U240.
2. Shaft Wall: Configure and install components as required to achieve the following
performance levels:
a. Positive Air Pressure Within Shaft: Sustained positive loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with
maximum mid-span deflection of L/240.
b. Negative Air Pressure Within Shaft: Sustained negative loads of 5 lbs/sf with a
maximum deflection of L/240.
3. Blocking and sheet metal backing point loads (grab bars, shower seats, handrails) in
partitions: 250 lbs minimum or local adopted code minimum, whichever is greater.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, glass mat faced gypsum board,
accessories, and joint finishing system.
C. Field Quality Control installation record: Provide 2 copies to the Owner upon project closeout.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840. Comply with requirements of GA-600 for fire-rated
assemblies.
B. B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials
and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and
finishing, with minimum five years of documented experience.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies as indicated on drawings.
B. Fire rated assemblies shall conform to all tested requirements for the specified U.L. assembly. It
shall be the contractor's responsibility to review all detailing and material requirements for the
specified U.L. assemblies.
C. Alternate assemblies that meet the fire and acoustic criteria may be considered by the Architect.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain any required governmental approvals and
supporting engineering for alternate assemblies.
D. Conform to local jurisdiction requirements for seismic bracing of suspended ceiling assemblies
1.08 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat
to prevent sagging.
1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy
surface contamination and discoloration.
2-092116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Metal Framing Manufacturers:
1. Steeler, Inc.; Seattle, WA; Product
2. SCAFCO Corporation; Spokane, WA; Product
3. Dietrich Metal Framing, Inc, Renton, WA; Product
4. Western Washing Metal Lath and Steel Framing Systems; Tacoma, WA.; Product
B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size
and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing required to meet
Structural Performance criteria.
C. Studs: C shaped; provide 25 gage studs unless noted other specifically in wall type assemblies
or referenced UL assemblies.
D. Bottom Tracks: U shaped, sized to match studs.
E. Ceiling Channels: U shaped, extended leg, slotted for fasteners, and sized to match studs.
F. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.
G. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories:ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties
necessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements.
H. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories:ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties
necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 and specified performance requirements.
I. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C 754 for spacing required. Anchors are
not to exceed 3/4" of penetration into Post Tension Slabs.
J. Pre-engineered ceiling framing system: Armstong ShortSpan Drywall Grid System or approved
substitution.
K. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of
sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short. Anchors are not to
exceed 3/4"of penetration into Post Tension Slabs.
L. Acoustic furring:
1. Flat; 24-26 gage galv. sheet metal.
2. 1-1/4"to 2-1/2"wide screw flange on one side and 1/2"to 3/4"wide screw flange on the
other side separated by a slotted metal bridge.
3. Slots in the bridge are to be 2-1/2" to 3-1/4" long by 0.25 to 0.32 inches wide and spaced
along the bridge on 3-1/2"to 4" centers.
4. Pre-punched fastener hole centered on bridge slots.
5. Depth: 1/2 inch.
6. Acceptable manufacturers
a. Type RC-1 by U.S. Gypsum
b. Type RCSD by Dietrich Metal Framing
7. Acoustic Furring Spacer Clips: "RC Assurance" by Keene Building Products
(877-514-5336); 5/16 inch deep.
M. Blocking: Refer to Section 06114
N. Sheet Metal Backing: 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal
2.03 BOARD MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:
1. CertainTeed Corporation:www.certainteed.com.
2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com.
August 21, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116- 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.
4. USG Corporation; Product: www.usg.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 016000- Product Requirements.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to
minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Thickness:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.
C. Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products:
1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds, shower
ceilings.
D. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Regular Type:
a. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Thickness: 1/2 inch, and 5/8 inch, as indicated.
c. Edges: Tapered.
2. Fire Resistant Type: Complying with Type X requirements; UL or WH rated.
a. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested
assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X.
b. Application: Where required for fire-rated assemblies, unless otherwise indicated.
c. Thickness: 1/2 inch, and 5/8 inch, as indicated.
d. Edges: Tapered.
3. Ceiling Board: Special sag-resistant type.
a. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
c. Edges: Tapered.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness:
2-1/2 inch. unless noted otherwise.
B. Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 079005.
C. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project
conditions.
1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise
indicated.
2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.
D. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood
Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for
exterior locations.
E. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954;
steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs.
F. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations.
G. Corner Beads and edge trim: Galvanized steel
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
4 -092116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3.02 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION
A. Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
1. Install studs at spacing required to meet performance requirements.
B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between special
friction studs.
1. Seal perimeter including at floor breaks of shaft wall and penetrations with fire sealant on
both sides and as indicated.
3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated or as
required by ceiling framing system manufacturer.
1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200.
2. Laterally brace entire suspension system to comply with local code.
C. Studs: Space studs as scheduled.
1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations.
2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain
clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with
continuous bridging.
D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less
than double studs at jambs.
E. Acoustic Furring:
1. Attach to framing at 24 inches o.c. max. utilizing an acoustic furring spacer clips at each
connection.
2. Attach only through pre-punched fastener holes or if not possible as close to the center of
a bridge slot as possible.
3. Ceiling furring installed parallel to adjacent vertical wall shall be within 6 inches of the
vertical wall.
4. Ceiling furring cantilevers shall be no greater than 6 inches at ends and stop the end of the
furring a minimum of 1/2 inch short of the vertical wall surface.
F. Wood Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures,toilet partitions, wall cabinets„
and new toilet grab bars at common toilet rooms and future toilet grab bars at all living unit bath
rooms, and future folding seats at all living unit showers. Comply with Section 061054 for wood
blocking.
G. Backing: 20 gage at toilet Accessories and other light weight hardware. Contractor may use FR
wood blocking at these locations at their option.
H. Acoustical Framing Considerations:
1. The Contractor shall maintain the the designated acoustical ratings of noted assemblies.
When, in the course of construction, the Contractor encounters an unforseen condition, he
shall immediately request clarification of the acoustical detail through a Request for
Information (RFI).
2. Contractor shall NOT create acoustical "bridges" in double stud acoustically rated walls.
Contractor to coordinate this requirement with all trades.
3. Offset wall penetrations in demising walls for electrical or data outlets by a minimum of 24
inches.
4. At double stud acoustically rated walls, maintain a minimum of 1/2 inch separation
between stud tracks.
5. Where acoustically rated walls abut another wall (acoustically rated or not) run the gypsum
wallboard of the higher rated wall continuously through the adjoined wall to the inner face
August 21, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116-5
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
of the opposite side of the wall and acoustically seal the edges of the gypsum wallboard.
Acoustically seal the edges of the penetrated wall.
6. Penetrations through acoustically rated walls 3 inches or larger shall be framed to provide
a 1 inch annular gap. The penetrating elements shall be wrapped the full thickness of the
wall with mineral wool. Fill the wallboard penetrations with closed cell foam backer rod.
Then apply 2 beads of acoustical sealant at each end.
7. At penetrations less than 3 inches, framing is not required at the penetration. Provided
insulation and sealant at noted in 6 above.
8. Multiple penetrations shall be separated by a minimum of 5 inches.
9. Run gypsum wall board continuously to structure at all acoustically rated walls.
3.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around
electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.
1. Place acoustic insulation above all bathroom ceilings
2. Wrap all drain pipes that do not fall within acoustically insulated walls or ceilings with
acoustic insulation.
B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Place two beads minimum continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter
framing members unless indicated otherwise.
2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.
3. In non-fire-rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and
rough-in boxes.
3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints,
especially in highly visible locations.
B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and
edges occurring over firm bearing.
C. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing.
D. Double-Layer Non-Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed parallel to framing or furring
members, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Place second layer perpendicular
to framing or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer.
E. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of listing
authority or approved assembly.
F. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members where indicated, in
accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.
G. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as follows:
1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and at ceilings without perimeter relief.
2. Not more than 50 feet apart at ceilings with perimeter relief.
3. At exterior soffits, not more than 30 feet apart in both directions.
4. Contractor shall coordinate location of all control joints with architect.
B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated.
3.07 JOINT TREATMENT
A. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based
joint compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.
6- 092116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. Finish gypsum board in scheduled areas in accordance with levels defined in GA-214 and as
scheduled below.
1. Above Finished Ceilings Concealed From View: Level 1.
2. Utility Areas and Areas Behind Cabinetry: Level 2.
3. Walls and Ceilings to Receive Flat or Eggshell Paint Finish: Level 4.
4. Contractor to coordinate gypsum board finish preparation with tenant improvement.
C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to
receive finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
D. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by
manufacturer.
3.08 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet
in any direction.
3.09 SCHEDULE OF WALLBOARD TYPES
A. Gypsum Wallboard - Regular
1. All locations not otherwise scheduled
B. Gypsum Wallboard -Type X
1. All fire rated assembly locations not otherwise scheduled
C. Ceiling Board
1. All suspended/furred ceilings and interior soffits unless noted otherwise.
D. Water Resistant Backing Board (regular and Type X as required)
1. Behind and to the side of plumbing fixtures at Toilet Rooms and Janitor's closets
2. Walls adjacent to sinks at kitchens
3.10 3.10 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
nondrywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy
surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116-7
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 099000
PAINTS AND COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation.
B. Field application of paints.
C. Surfaces to be finished are indicated in this section and on the Drawings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.
B. Section 220553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Painted identification.
C. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Painted identification.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D4442-Structural Test Method for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of wood and
wood-based Materials.
B. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D- National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
C. GreenSeal GS-11 -Architectural Paints; 1993:
1. GreenSeal Standard GC-03, Anti-Corrosive Paints, 1997.
2. South Coast Air Quality management District(SCAQMD) Rule 1113, 2004.
D. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Master
Painters and Decorators Association; 2004.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for
each:
1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category
(e.g. "latex").
2. MSDS Sheets for all interior paints and coatings.
C. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.
D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings do not contain any of the prohibited
chemicals specified.
E. Samples: Submit three paper"draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating
range of colors available for each finishing product specified:
1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen. If a color is specified in
multiple sheens, provide samples with all specified sheens.
F. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated
surfaces.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years experience.
B. Maintain one copy of relevant portions of MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual on
project site at all times.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
August 21, 2013 PAINTS AND COATINGS 099000- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90
degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Coordinate disposal of empty containers; packaging & cleaning materials with Waste
Management Plan 01732.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the
humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F
for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. See Section 016000- Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
B. Supply 5 gallons of each common area color; store where directed.
C. Label each container with color and mix code in addition to the manufacturer's label, and local
supplier.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same
manufacturer; no exceptions.
B. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent
possible.
C. Paints: Acceptable manufacturers if they meet paint criteria are limited to the following:
1. Olympic Paint and Stain.
2. Benjamin Moore &Co.
3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
4. Rodda Paint Company.
5. Miller Paint Company.
6. Sherwin Williams Paint Company.
7. Parker Paint Company.
D. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS- GENERAL
A. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Interior Paints&coatings shall comply with the requirements specified in the following:
a. USGBC LEED Rating System:
1) Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates:
250 g/L max.
2) Clear wood finish: Laquer-550.
3) Clear wood finish: Varnish-350.
4) Floor coatings: 100.
5) Shellacs: clear 730.
2 - 099000 PAINTS AND COATINGS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
6) Shellacs: pigmented 55D.
7) Sealers Waterproofing: 250.
8) Sealers: Sanding Sealers 275.
9) Sealers: All others 200.
10) Stains: 250 g/L.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added
at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:
1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds
(hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).
2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di
(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene,
diethyl phthalate., dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium,
isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene
chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.
C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac,turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not
specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality.
D. Patching Material: Latex filler.
E. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS
A. Provide Premium Grade systems (2 top coats)as defined in MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual, except as otherwise indicated.
B. Where a specified paint system does not have a Premium Grade, provide Custom Grade
system.
C. Provide colors as scheduled in this specification. Refer to Finish Schedule.
D. Sheen Rating @ 60°@ 85°
1. Flat< 5< 5
2. Velvet< 54-20
3. Eggshell5-1010-20
4. Satinl0-2020-30
5. Semi-Gloss35-55NA
6. Gloss75-85NA
2.04 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS
A. Concrete Vertical Surfaces:
1. EXT 3.1A Latex: Satin - Custom Grade
B. Concrete Paving Marking:
1. EXT 3.2E Latex Zone/Traffic Marking: Satin.
C. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: Refer to Section 09960.
D. Galvanized Metal, Not Chromate Passivated: Refer to Section 09960.
E. Stucco Walls and Soffits:
1. EXT 9.1A Latex: Satin - Premium Grade
2.05 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS
A. Perimeter Concrete Vertical Surfaces:
1. INT 3.1A (P5) Latex Insulating Paint: Nansulate"Home Protect White" manufactured by
Industrial Nanotech Inc.
a. 3 coats; total 4.5 to 7.5 mil dry film thickness (primer not required)
B. Concrete Masonry Units:
August 21, 2013 PAINTS AND COATINGS 099000 - 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1. INT 4.2A Latex: Same as concrete perimeter vertical surfaces
C. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications:
1. Steel doors and Frames - INT 5.1R (factory Prime) Semi-Gloss.
2. Steel Railings: Refer to Section 09960.
3. Misc. Steel Fabrication - INT 5.1R - Semi-Gloss.
4. Steel Bollards: Rodda Metal Master DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel Safety Yellow#5589845
D. Gypsum Board:
1. Applications include but are not limited to walls, ceilings, and soffits.
2. INT 9.2A Latex:
a. Ceilings and soffits: Velvet.
b. Walls: Eggshell.
c. Restroom walls and ceilings: semi-gloss.
E. Wood:
1. Plywood utility panels: INT 6.4A with latex primer-Semi-Gloss; Custom Grade
2. Lumber: INT 6.4A with latex primer- Semi-Gloss; Premium Grade
F. Exposed Mechanical & Electrical Equipment:
1. Mechanical grilles & registers: Shop paint to match wall/ceiling color: INT 5.1K-Satin
spray applied.
2. Visible duct interiors: INT 5.1Q - Flat Black- 3' Back from Grill or register- Primer plus one
coat.
3. Access panels doors and frames: INT 5.1K-Satin Spray applied; Premium Grade
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SCOPE - SURFACES TO BE FINISHED
A. Paint all exposed surfaces except where indicated not to be painted or to remain natural; the
term "exposed" includes areas visible through permanent and built-in fixtures when they are in
place.
B. Paint the surfaces described in PART 2, indicated on the Drawings, and as follows:
1. If a surface, material, or item is not specifically mentioned, paint in the same manner as
similar surfaces, materials, or items, regardless of whether colors are indicated or not.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furnishings the same as similar exposed
surfaces.
3. Paint surfaces to be concealed behind permanently installed fixtures, equipment, and
furnishings, using primer only, prior to installation of the permanent item.
4. Paint back sides of access panels and removable and hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
5. Finish top, bottom, and side edges of exterior doors the same as exposed faces.
6. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts,
hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment
occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Paint equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in utility areas in colors according
to the color coding scheme indicated.
8. Paint all mechanical and electrical equipment, including that which is factory-finished,
exposed to weather or to view on the roof and outdoors.
9. Paint shop-primed mechanical and electrical items occurring in finished areas.
10. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and
electrical components and shop paint separately-spray applied.
11. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts with flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers, grilles, or louvers.
12. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, to match face panels.
13. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment
before installing equipment.
4- 099000 PAINTS AND COATINGS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
C. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted; factory-primed items are not
considered factory-finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finish.
3. Items indicated to remain naturally finished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of
equipment.
5. Acoustical materials.
6. Concealed piping, ductwork, and conduit.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially affect proper application.
C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials; report incompatible
primer conditions and submit recommended changes for Architect's approval.
D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes
unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Plaster and Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
3. Concrete Floors: 8 percent.
4. Interior and Exterior wood: 15 percent measured in accordance with ASTM D-4442.
E. Measure the ph factor of concrete, masonry, and mortar before starting any finishing process,
using the method specified in MPI Architectural Painting Manual:
1. Report results in writing to Architect before starting work.
2. If results of test indicates need for remedial action, provide written description of remedial
action.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces as specified in MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual and as follows
for the applicable surface and coating; if multiple preparation treatments are specified, use as
many as necessary for best results; where the Manual references external standards for
preparation (e.g. SSPC standards), prepare as specified in those standards; comply with
coating manufacturer's specific preparation methods or treatments, if any.
B. Coordinate painting work with cleaning and preparation work so that dust and other
contaminants do not fall on newly painted, wet surfaces.
C. Surface Appurtenances: Prior to preparing surfaces or finishing, remove electrical plates,
hardware, light fixtures, light fixture trim, escutcheons, machined surfaces, fittings, and similar
items already installed that are not to be painted:
1. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide
surface-applied protection before preparation and finishing.
2. After completing painting in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers
skilled in the trades involved.
D. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or
repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.
E. Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes.
F. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and
bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
G. Concrete, Cement Plaster and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted:
1. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter.
2. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry.
August 21, 2013 PAINTS AND COATINGS 099000- 5
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium
metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
4. Roughen as required to remove glazing from hardeners or sealers that have been used to
improve curing. Use mechanical method of surface preparation.
5. Use abrasive blast cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
H. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime
defects after repair.
I. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces to be Painted: Remove foreign particles to permit
adhesion of finishing materials. Apply latex based sealer or primer.
J. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with
solvent. Apply coat of etching primer:
1. Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and
surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from
coil stock by mechanical or chemical methods as recommended as best practice by primer
manufacturer.
K. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt,
and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or
sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution,
ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot
prime after repairs:
1. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures
Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied
prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by
paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.
L. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer
and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with
solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
M. Interior Wood Items to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has
dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
N. Metal Doors to be Painted: Touch up factory primed metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified or
recommended by MPI Manual, using the preparation, products, sheens, textures, and colors as
indicated:
1. Provide completed work matching approved samples for color, texture, and coverage.
2. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.
B. Do not apply finishes over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or other
conditions detrimental to formation of a durable coating film; do not apply finishes to surfaces
that are not dry.
C. Use applicators and methods best suited for substrate and type of material being applied and
according to manufacturer's instructions:
1. Brush Application: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied; use brush of
appropriate size for the surface or item being painted; produce results free of visible brush
marks.
2. Roller Application: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as
recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.
3. Spray Application: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
6- 099000 PAINTS AND COATINGS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
4. Where application method is listed in the MPI Manual for the paint system that application
method is required; otherwise any application method recommended by manufacturer for
material used and objects to be painted is acceptable.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate; provide total dry film thickness of entire system as recommended
by manufacturer:
1. Number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method.
2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional
coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance.
3. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners
receive dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
E. Apply finish to completely cover surfaces with uniform appearance without brush marks, runs,
sags, laps, ropiness, holidays, spotting, cloudiness, or other surface imperfections:
1. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.
2. Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material recommended by
manufacturer, unless the surface has been prime coated by others; where evidence of
suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appear, recoat primed and sealed surfaces to
ensure finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
3. Apply first coat to surface that has been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared as
soon as practical after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
4. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by
manufacturer.
5. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky
under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat will not cause the
undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
6. If manufacturer's instructions recommend sanding to produce a smooth, even surface,
sand between coats.
7. Before applying next coat vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to
remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat.
8. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Provide smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color,
appearance, and coverage.
F. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied and
adequately dried to receive paint.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 014000- Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection.
B. Contractor shall test and submit certification the insulating paint at perimeter walls interiors has
been applied at the specified dry mil thickness.
3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
B. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint
materials from site coordinating with project waste management plan.
C. Protect other work, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage
by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting as approved by Architect.
D. Provide "Wet Paint"signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in MPI Manual.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 PAINTS AND COATINGS 099000 - 7
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 099600
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. High performance coating for application to specifically noted exterior miscellaneous metals and
railings.
B. Special preparation of surfaces.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
B. Section 05520 - Handrails and Railings.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. FS TT-C-542 -Coating, Polyurethane, Oil-Free, Moisture Curing; Federal Specifications and
Standards; Revision E, 1978.
B. SSPC-SP 11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal; Society for Protective Coatings; 1995 (Part
of Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. Two).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating coating materials .
C. Samples: Submit three samples 8x10 inch in size illustrating colors for selection.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions
requiring special attention, and environmental criteria.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: Include cleaning procedures and repair and patching techniques, local
suppliers and specific color mix formulas.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum five years documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 5 years documented experience.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install materials when temperature is below 45 degrees F or above 90 degrees F. or
manufacturer's requirements; whichever is more restrictive.
B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when the relative humidity exceeds 85%.
C. Do not apply coating if these conditions cannot be met 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours
after installation of coating. In no case shall the coating be applied if the temperature is less
than 5 degrees above the dew point.
D. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain the temperatures and conditions specified
before proceeding with coating operation:
1. Work may occur in inclement weather if area of work is enclosed and specified application
criteria can be met.
2. The use of moisture cured polyurethane coatings will be allowed for primary and
intermediate coats if required by the Contractor to maintain schedule during extend periods
of inclement weather. Manufacturer's criteria for temperature and humidity apply in full.
Any additional cost incurred as a result of using these products shall be borne by the
Contractor.
August 21, 2013 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
E. Restrict traffic from area where coating is being applied or is curing.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780-Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Warranty: Include coverage for bond to substrate and degradation of chemical resistance.
1.08 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS
A. Provide 2 gallon of each color of each type of coating specified, for Owner's maintenance use.
B. Label each container with manufacturer's name, product number, color number, and contact
information of local supplier.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL COATINGS - EXTERIOR
A. Coatings -General: Provide complete multi-coat systems formulated and recommended by
manufacturer for the applications indicated, in the thicknesses indicated; number of coats
specified does not include primer or filler coat:
1. Lead content: Not greater than 0.06 percent by weight of total nonvolatile content.
2. Chromium content, as zinc chromate or strontium chromate: None.
3. Maximum volatile organic compound (VOC)content: As required by applicable
regulations.
4. Colors: As indicated.
B. Primer: Use manufacturer's factory-formulated primer that is certified compatible with the
substrate and finish coats indicated:
1. Provide only factory-grind primer. Quick tint primer/sealers are not acceptable.
2. Application of shop applied primer for steel fabrications is included in the work Division 5
sections.
3. Zinc-rinch Primer:
a. Carbozinc 858 by Carboline.
b. MC-Zinc by Wasser(zinc rich primer component for the moisture cured polyurethane
system).
4. Epoxy Architectural Primer: Available products: subject to compliance with requirements,
epoxy primers that may be incorporated in the work include:
a. Series 66 - Hi-Build Epoxoline by Tnemec.
b. Devran 224HS by ICI-Devoe.
c. Armorseal 33 by Sherwin Williams.
d. Amercoat 385 by Ameron.
e. Carbogard 888 by Carboline.
f. MC-Ferrox B by Wasser(epoxy primer component for the moisture cured
polyurethane system).
C. Intermediate Coat Materials: Manufacturer's factory-formulated intermediate coat that is certified
compatible with the substrate, primers or base coats, and finish coats indicated:
1. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Available products subject to compliance with requirements,
epoxy primers that may be incorporated in the work include:
a. Series 66- Hi-Build Epoxoline by Tnemec.
b. Devan 224HS by ICI-Devoe.
c. Armorseal 33 by Sherwin Williams.
d. Amercoat 385 by Ameron.
e. Carbogard 888 by Carboline.
f. MC-Ferrox B by Wasser(epoxy primer component for the moisture cured
polyurethane system).
2 - 099600 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
D. Finish Coat Materials: Manufacturer's factory-formulated intermediate coat that is certified
compatible with the substrate, primers or base coats, and intermediate coats indicated:
1. Polyurethane Architectural Finish Coat: Available products subject to compliance with
requirements, epoxy primers that may be incorporated in the work include:
a. Series 73- Endura Shield by Tnemec.
b. Devthane 379 by ICI-Devoe.
c. Acrolon 218 HS by Sherwin Williams.
d. Amercoat 450HS by Ameron.
e. Carbothane 133 HB by Carboline.
f. MC - Luster by Wasser.
E. Colors: Colors for steel coating finish coating materials will be scheduled by the Architect.
F. Sheen: 20-25 at 60 degrees.
2.02 STEEL COATING - INTERIOR
A. Coatings-General: Provide complete multi-coat systems formulated and recommended by
manufacturer for the applications indicated, in the thicknesses indicated; number of coats
specified does not include primer or filler coat:
1. Lead content: Not greater than 0.06 percent by weight of total nonvolatile content.
2. Chromium content, as zinc chromate or strontium chromate: None.
3. Maximum volatile organic compound (VOC)content: 250 g/L per Green Seal Standard
GC-03.
4. Colors: As indicated.
B. Epoxy Architectural Primer: Available products: subject to compliance with requirements, epoxy
primers that may be incorporated in the work include:
1. Devran 224HS by ICI-Devoe.
C. Intermediate Coat Materials: Manufacturer's factory-formulated intermediate coat that is certified
compatible with the substrate, primers or base coats, and finish coats indicated:
1. Devran 224HS by ICI-Devoe.
D. Finish Coat Materials: Manufacturer's factory-formulated intermediate coat that is certified
compatible with the substrate, primers or base coats, and intermediate coats indicated:
1. Devthane 379 by ICI-Devoe.
2.03 GYPSUM WALLBOARD COATING - INTERIOR
A. Epoxy Coating: Two coats, water-based epoxy, FS TT-C-535, Type II, semi-gloss finish.
B. Primer: per manufacturer's recommendation
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the coating
manufacturer. Obtain and follow manufacturer's instructions for examination and testing of
substrates.
C. Verify that all surfaces are completely dry.
D. Review adjacent work and other specification sections to verify compatibility of coating materials
with other adjacent work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove finish hardware, hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures and similar items already in place that are not to be coated or provide surface applied
protection prior to surface preparation and coating:
1. Remove these items, if necessary to completely coat the items and adjacent surfaces.
August 21, 2013 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
2. Following the coating operations in each space or area, have removed items reinstalled by
workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying coatings or other surface treatments, clean the substrate of any any
substances that could impair bonding of the subsequent coatings:
1. Remove any oil and grease including wax or grease pencil ID fabrication markings.
2. Schedule cleaning and coating applications so dust and other contaminates from the
cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Prepare surfaces to be coated according to the specific manufacturer's
instructions for each particular substrate condition:
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers; or remove using abrasive blast cleaning
methods if recommended by the coating system manufacturer and re-prime.
2. Steel: Clean areas of damaged shop primer per SSPS-SP11; "Power Tool Cleaning to
Bare Metal".
D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare materials in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's directions:
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of coatings according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Stir material before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required
during application.
3. Use only the types of thinners approved by the manufacturer and only within
recommended limits.
E. Undercoat Shades: Provide undercoats in different shades, so that individually applied coats
can readily be discerned. The shades of each undercoat shall be consistent throughout the
project.
F. Field addition of colorants is prohibited.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply steel coatings by brush, roller, spray and other applicators according to the
manufacturer's directions:
1. Use brushes best suited for the material being applied.
2. Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Use spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the
material and texture required.
4. Do not apply coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or
conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film.
5. Provide finish coats compatible with the primers used.
6. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the
manufacturer. Where sanding is required by manufacturer's directions, sand between
applications to provide a smooth, even surface.
7. When undercoats or other conditions show through the final coat, apply additional coats
until the cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. Give special
attention to edges, corners, crevices, welds, exposed fasteners, and similar surfaces to
ensure that they receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
B. Scheduling Primer Coating: Schedule and sequence priming operations such that primer coat is
applied to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for coating within
4-6 hours of blast cleaning and before subsequent surface deterioration:
1. Allow sufficient drying time between successive coats.
2. Do not re-coat until the coating has dried so it feels firm and does not deform or feel sticky
under moderate thumb pressure and where applying another coat does not cause the
undercoat to life or lose adhesion.
4 - 099600 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by the manufacturer, except where specifically noted otherwise.
D. Re-coat primed and sealed substrates where suction spots or unsealed areas in the first coat
indicate possible burn-through or other defects in the finish coat caused by insufficient sealing.
E. Field Application of Primer and Coating Touch-up: Touch up all steel after erection as follows:
1. All field-applied primer to be applied within 4-6 hours of final surface preparation.
contractor to sequence coating touch-up work accurately.
2. Where area to be touched-up is less than or equal to one square foot: apply specified
intermediate coat material for that area as the touch-up primer. Intermediate and finish
coating materials to remain as specified.
3. Where area to be touched-up is greater than one square foot: apply primer, intermediate
and finish coating materials as specified.
F. Spray Applications: Apply coatings by airless or conventional spray techniques when permitted
by the manufacturer's recommendations:
1. Wherever using spray application, do not double-back with spray equipment, building-up a
film thickness of two coats in one pass, unless recommended by the manufacturer.
G. Brush Application: Where spray application is not possible, brush-out and work brush coats into
surfaces in an even film:
1. Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other
surface imperfections.
2. Neatly draw glass lines and color breaks.
H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or recoat work not complying with specified requirements.
3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Cleanup:At the end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded
materials from the site.
B. Where undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until the
cured film is of uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.
C. After completing work, clean glass and spattered surfaces. Remove splattered coatings by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being coated or not, against damage from coating
operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and re-coating, as acceptable to
the Architect. Leave in an undamaged condition:
1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrapping provided by others to protect their work after completing coating operations.
2. At completion of other trades'construction activities, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced coated surfaces.
3.06 SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Applications
1. Steel canopy assemblies.
2. Exterior railing assemblies.
3. Miscellaneous steel fabrications including bollards, brackets, lintels, rolled section frames.
4. Coiling doors and frames.
B. Interior Applications:
1. Restroom walls and ceiling
C. Refer to drawings for additional specific locations of high performance coatings.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 5
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 101400
INDENTIFICATION DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cash allowance for signs.
1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Project Allowance: $1,000 (exterior signage)
B. Allowance amount covers purchase, delivery, and installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS
A. Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADA Standards for Accessible
Design and ANSI/ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the
event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific
requirements.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 INDENTIFICATION DEVICES 101400- 1
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 104400
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire extinguishers.
B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
C. Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 061054-Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking and shims.
B. Section 09259 - Gypsum Wall Board assemblies: Roughed-in wall openings.
C. Section 099000- Painting and Coating: Field paint finish.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 10- Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.
B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
edition.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to NFPA 10.
B. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose
specified and indicated.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Amerix
2. J.L. Industries
3. Larsen
4. Potter-Roemer
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable
codes, whichever is more stringent.
B. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Cast steel tank, with pressure gage.
1. Class A:B:C.
2. Size 10.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, red color.
2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET-TYPE 1 (FEC1) NOT USED
2.04 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET-TYPE 2 (FEC2)
A. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal.
B. Cabinet Configuration: Surface type.
1. Sized to accommodate accessories.
C. Door: 0.036 inch thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180 degree
opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon catch.
D. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors.
August 21, 2013 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
E. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Primed for field paint finish.
F. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel.
2.05 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET-TYPE 3 (FEC3)
A. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal.
B. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-Recessed type.
C. Door: 0.036 inch thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180 degree
opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon catch.
D. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors.
E. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Primed for field paint finish.
F. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Cabinet Signage: Factory applied; red "FIRE EXTINGUISHER".
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 36 inches from finished floor to inside bottom
of cabinet.
C. Secure rigidly in place.
D. Place extinguishers in cabinets.
END OF SECTION
2 - 104400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 111313
LOADING DOCK BUMPERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Dock bumpers of reinforced rubber with attachment frame.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 031000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Placement of bumper anchors into
concrete.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Dock Bumpers:
1. Chalfant Sewing Fabricators, Inc.; Product 6"x12"x18" hot dipped galvanized finish for
exposed steel angles. : www.chalfantusa.com.
2. Durable Corp; Product Dura-Soft BumpersTM: Rubber pads 4"thick with loop pad and
3/8"steel-face for overall thickness at 5-1/2".: www.durablecorp.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Bumpers: Fabric reinforced rubber pads, ozone resistant, laminated and compressed in
position with two galvanized steel rods with threaded ends, washers and nuts; between 3 x
2-1/2 x 1/4 inch galvanized steel angle end plates:
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install dock bumpers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Set plumb and level.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 LOADING DOCK BUMPERS 111313- 1
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 111319.13
LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Prefabricated steel leveler supplied by Owner and installed by Contractor.
B. Pallet Scale: supplied by Owner and installed by Contractor
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 02220 - Selective Demolition - removal of concrete
B. Section 031000-Concrete Forming and Accessories: Placement of leveler frame and safety
lock frame into concrete loading dock.
C. Section 033000- Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete pti.
D. Division 15- Mechanical: floor drain at loading dock.
E. Division 16- Electrical -conduit for scale and intrumentation interface
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Dock Levelers: Refer to Owner provided equipment cutcheet for reference.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that rough-in openings are acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in prepared opening in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Set square and level.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust installed unit and safety device for smooth and balanced operation.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 111319.13 - 1
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 129300
SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Bicycle Cycloops
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product specified, including detailed
installation diagrams and recommended installation methods.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SITE FURNISHINGS
A. Bicycle Cycloops: Timberform 2170-C-E.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 SITE FURNISHINGS 129300- 1
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 310000
EARTHWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Perform minor site earthwork as shown in drawings and specified herein.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Public Works Standards, Inc. "Greenbook" Standard Specifications for Public Works
Construction, 2003 Edition
B. Annual Book of American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)Standards, 2004 Edition,
Volume 4.08.
C. ASTM D 1557, Test Methods of Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified
Effort.
D. ASTM C 117, Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75 m (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral
Aggregates by Washing.
E. ASTM D 2419, Sand Equivalent of Soils and Aggregates.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In-place field density tests to be performed by Geotechnical Engineer and paid for by Owner to
determine adequacy of compaction of fill and backfill materials:
1. Tests will be performed as deemed necessary to determine adequacy of compaction and
in accordance with City of Beaverton requirements.
2. Cooperate with testing by Geotechnical Engineer.
B. Do not cover site improvements with backfill materials prior to required evaluations, tests, and
approvals:
1. Backfill materials covering un-inspected, untested, and rejected bottoms or site
improvements to be removed and replaced at the no expense to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Imported Fill:
1. Free of organic matter and other deleterious materials and, in general, should consist of
particles no larger than 6 inches in largest dimension.
2. Structurally separate features, and minor structures, imported fill to be sand or sand and
gravel, or crushed rock free of clay balls, roots, organic matter, and other deleterious
materials:
a. Materials may be quarry run, crushed rock, or crushed gravel and sand that is well
graded and to have maximum particle size of 3 inches and to have less than 5
percent passing U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM
C 117.
b. Percent passing can be increased to 12 percent if fill is placed during dry weather.
3. Imported Fill Materials: To have minimum sand equivalent of 35 in accordance with ASTM
D 2419.
a. Fill materials to be approved for intended on-site use by Geotechnical Engineer prior
to delivery to site.
B. Trench Bottom Stabilization Material:
1. Trench Bottom Stabilization Material: 1/4-inch to 4-inch well graded, crushed rock or
crushed gravel free of deleterious materials.
2. Percent passing U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve to be less than 5 percent by weight when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 117.
C. Imported Base Material:
August 21, 2013 EARTHWORK 310000 - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1. Use imported based material as directed in these Specifications and including, but not
limited to, floor slab base, flatwork and paving base material, as required by project plans.
2. Imported Base Material: 1-1/2 inch or 3/4 inch-minus crushed rock or crushed gravel and
sand, conforming to requirements of"Greenbook" Part 3, Section 300-3.5.1.
3. Percent passing U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve to be less than 5 percent by weight when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 117.
D. Imported Granular Material for Pipe Bedding and Pipe Zone:
1. Pipe bedding and pipe zone for concrete and ductile iron pipe shall be as specified for
imported granular material, 3/4 inch-minus size, with exception that percent passing U.S.
Standard No. 200 Sieve to be less than 8 percent by weight when tested in accordance
with ASTM C 117.
2. Pipe bedding and pipe zone for copper pipe and electrical conduit to be 1/4 inch-minus
imported granular material.
2.02 COMPACTION AND MOISTURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
A. Operate compaction equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations:
1. Maintain equipment in such a condition that it will deliver manufacturer's rated compactive
effort.
2. Provide larger and/or different types of additional equipment if required to obtain adequate
compaction.
3. Hand-operated equipment to be capable of achieving specified compaction.
B. Equipment for applying water to be of type and quality adequate for Work, not leak, and be
equipped with distributor bar or other device to assure uniform application:
1. Equipment for mixing and drying materials to consist of blades, discs, or other equipment
adequate to provide thorough mixing or drying of materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION
A. Scope: Removal and disposal of material encountered. All excavation is unclassified:
1. Excavate to depth, lines, and grades shown on Drawings or as otherwise specified.
B. Disposal of Waste Material:
1. Waste materials and excess topsoil to be stockpiled or disposed off site as directed by
Owner. Verify off-site disposal with Owner.
2. Restrict temporary storage of waste materials and materials to be reused at work areas to
locations directed by Owner.
3.02 BACKFILL AND FILL
A. General Backfill: Consist of suitable fill materials, specified herein.
B. Compaction Requirements: Compact soils to not less than following percentages of maximum
dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 test procedure:
1. Building Areas:
a. Compact each layer of imported base fill material to at least 95 percent of maximum
dry density.
2. Walkways, Pavement Areas:
a. Compact each layer of imported backfill, or granular fill materials: Compact to at least
95 percent of maximum dry density.
b. Select Structural fill: to 95 percent of maximum dry density.
3. Retaining Wall or Below-Grade Walls:
a. Except within the zone that is 3 feet horizontally from the back of the wall, compact
each layer of backfill to at least 95 percent of maximum dry density.
b. Zone within 3 feet from back of wall: to between 90 and 92 percent of maximum
density using hand-held compaction equipment.
2 - 310000 EARTHWORK August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
4. Trench Excavation Backfill:
a. Within building and pavement areas: Compact trench backfill placed above pipe zone
to at least 92 percent of maximum dry density at depths greater than 3 feet below
finished subgrade and to at least 95 percent of maximum dry density within 2 feet of
finished subgrade.
b. Other areas: Compact trench backfill above pipe zone to at least 90 percent of
maximum dry density.
C. Placing Fill and Backfill Materials:
1. Spread backfill and fill materials uniformly adjacent to structures to required elevations.
2. Where compacted areas are disturbed by construction operations or adverse weather,
scarify surface, reshape and compact to required density, or remove and replace with
same class of material prior to further construction.
3. Spread imported granular materials and compact in uniform horizontal layers not to
exceed 8 inches prior to completion:
a. Hand Operated Compaction Equipment: fill or backfill materials to be placed in layers
not exceeding 6 inches prior to compaction.
4. Compact soils using equipment designed for compacting type of soil being placed:
a. Utilize operating procedures to attain uniform compaction of area being filled.
5. Do not place, spread, or compact fill material during freezing, rainy or unfavorable weather
conditions:
a. Frozen or disturbed subgrade materials to be removed prior to placement of
subsequent lifts of fill materials.
6. Do not place fill and backfill until tests and inspections have been made and appropriate
approvals have been obtained:
a. Do not damage or displace underground utilities during backfilling and compaction.
7. Moisture-condition fill and backfill material as required to obtain specified compaction
requirements:
a. Accomplish soil wetting and drying by thoroughly mixing soil to provide uniform soil
moisture throughout each layer.
3.03 TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Excavation:
1. Excavate trenches to lines and grades shown in drawings:
a. Width of trenches: Not less than diameter of pipe plus 18 inches or greater than
diameter of pipe plus 24 inches.
2. On-site conditions include silty and sandy gravel with occasional cobbles and boulders:
a. Utility trench backfill volume calculations: Base on site conditions.
B. Placing Trench Stabilization Material:
1. Prepared subgrade to be evaluated by Geotechnical Engineer prior to placing pipe bedding
material.
2. Excavate unsuitable trench bottom materials and replace with trench stabilization material
placed and compacted as directed by Geotechnical Engineer.
C. Placing Pipe Bedding and Pipe Zone Material:
1. Place minimum 4-inch thickness of bedding material over full width of trench to elevation
of horizontal centerline of pipe.
2. Spread bedding and grade so pipe is uniformly supported along barrel.
a. Excavate bell holes at each joint to permit assembly and inspection of entire joint.
b. Bed pipe so that flow line is at required elevation.
3. Backfill trench to 6 inches over top of pipe with pipe zone material.
a. Place pipe zone material in loose lifts not exceeding 6 inches in uncompacted
thickness simultaneously on both sides of pipe.
4. Carefully work pipe zone material under sides of pipe by slicing with shovel or other
approved procedure to provide firm backing for pipe and prevent lateral movement of pipe.
August 21, 2013 EARTHWORK 310000 -3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
5. Pipe zone material compaction: 95 percent of maximum dry density or as recommended
by pipe manufacturer.
D. Placing Trench Backfill Materials:
1. Backfill remainder of trench with approved imported granular fill materials. Compact as
specified in Part 3.5 of this section.
2. Utility trench backfill volume calculations should be based on the site conditions.
3.04 COMPLETION
A. Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated materials, trash, debris, and native
materials resulting from excavation and grading:
1. Load, haul, and legally dispose of materials off-site, or as otherwise directed in Drawings
or Section 3.1 of these specifications.
B. Sweep public streets and sidewalks free of spilled off-site borrow and surplus materials as it
accumulates, at least once during each working day during hauling operations.
END OF SECTION
4- 310000 EARTHWORK August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 321123
AGGREGATE BASE COURSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aggregate base course.
B. Paving aggregates.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 321216 -Asphalt Paving: Binder and finish asphalt courses.
B. Section 321313 - Concrete Paving: Finish concrete surface course.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates; 2006.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source.
C. Compaction Density Test Reports.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aggregate for base course material shall consist of granular material, either naturally occurring
or processed, and shall meet the following requirements for grading and quality:
1. 3/4 inch sieve: 90 to 100 percent passing.
2. 3/8 inch sieve: 55 to 75 percent passing.
3. 1/4 inch sieve:40- 60 percent passing
4. Of the portion passing the 1/4 inch sieve, 40-60 percent shall pass the No. 10 sieve
5. Sand equivalent: not less than 30%.
6. All percentages by weight.
7. Fracture of rounded rock shall be determined according to AASHTO TP61. Provide at
least fractured face of 70% retained by the 1/4 inch sieve.
B. Fine Aggregate: Natural river or bank sand; washed;free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble
materials, and organic matter.
1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C136; within the following limits:
a. No. 4 sieve: 100 percent passing.
b. No. 14 sieve: 10 to 100 percent passing.
c. No. 50 sieve: 5 to 90 percent passing.
d. No. 100 sieve: 4 to 30 percent passing.
e. No. 200 sieve: 0 percent passing.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 321123- 1
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 321216
ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Single course bituminous concrete paving patching.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01700 - Execution requirements: Cutting and Patching
B. Section 02300 - Earthwork -grading and compaction of sub-grade
C. Section 321123 -Aggregate Base Courses: Aggregate base course.
D. Section 02751 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving: curbs.
E. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Pavement markings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Al MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types; The Asphalt
Institute; 1997.
B. ASTM D946 -Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in
Pavement Construction; 2009a.
C. ODOT - Oregon Department of Transportation
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Oregon Highways standard.
B. Mixing Plant: Conform to State of Oregon Highways standard.
C. Obtain materials from same source throughout.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for paving work on public property.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not place asphalt when ambient air or base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F,
or surface is wet or frozen.
B. Place bitumen mixture when temperature is not more than 15 F degrees below bitumen
supplier's bill of lading and not more than maximum specified temperature.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D946.
B. Aggregate for Wearing Course: In accordance with State of Oregon Highways standards.
C. Fine Aggregate: In accordance with State of Oregon Highways standards.
D. Primer: In accordance with State of Oregon Highways standards.
E. Tack Coat: Homogeneous, medium curing, liquid asphalt.
2.02 ASPHALT PAVING MIXES AND MIX DESIGN
A. Wearing Course: 5 to 7 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in accordance with Al
MS-2.
B. Submit proposed mix design of each class of mix for review prior to beginning of work.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test mix design and samples in accordance with Al MS-2.
August 21, 2013 ASPHALT PAVING 321216- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
3.02 PREPARATION - PRIMER
A. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply primer on aggregate base or subbase at uniform rate of 1/3 gal/sq yd.
C. Use clean sand to blot excess primer.
3.03 PREPARATION -TACK COAT
A. Apply tack coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply tack coat on asphalt or concrete surfaces over subgrade surface at uniform rate of 1/3
gal/sq yd.
3.04 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - SINGLE COURSE
A. Install Work in accordance with State of Oregon Highways standards.
B. Place asphalt within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat.
C. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from
position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.
D. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish without roller marks.
E. Seal and sand edges at transition to existing paving
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge.
B. Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch of specified or indicated thickness.
C. Variation from True Elevation: Within 1/2 inch.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for quality control.
B. Provide field inspection and testing. Take samples and perform tests in accordance with
AASHTO T-209.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury for 3 days or until
surface temperature is less than 140 degrees F.
END OF SECTION
2 - 321216 ASPHALT PAVING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 321313
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete sidewalks, integral curbs, and miscellaneous site flatwork.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 02300 - Earthwork
B. Section 321123 -Aggregate Base Courses
C. Section 321216-Asphalt Paving: Asphalt wearing course.
D. Section 032000-Concrete Reinforcing.
E. Section 079005-Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints.
F. Section 099000- Painting and Coating: Pavement markings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002).
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 2010.
C. ACI 304R- Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American
Concrete Institute International; 2000.
D. ACI 305R- Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
E. ACI 306R- Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
F. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2012.
G. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 201 la.
H. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 2012a.
I. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2012.
J. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.
K. ASTM C173/C173M -Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 2010b.
L. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Design Data: Indicate pavement thickness, designed concrete strength, reinforcement, and
typical details.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PAVING ASSEMBLIES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of ACI 301.
B. Concrete Sidewalks and Curbs: 3,000 psi 28 day concrete, 4 inches thick, buff color Portland
cement.
C. Parking Area Pavement: 4,000 psi 28 day concrete, 5 inches thick, 6/6-6 x 6 inch mesh
reinforcement, wood float finish.
August 21, 2013 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 321313- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
2.02 FORM MATERIALS
A. Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301.
2.03 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Reinforcement: Types specified in Section 032000.
B. Dowels: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280); deformed billet steel bars; unfinished finish.
2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout.
B. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M Normal -Type I portland type, grey color.
C. Fine and Coarse Mix Aggregates: ASTM C33.
D. Water: Clean, and not detrimental to concrete.
E. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260.
2.05 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis
of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.
1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates
recommended by manufacturer.
D. Concrete Properties:
1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days:
3000 psi at sidewalks and curb;4,000 psi at vehicular traffic areas.
2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
3. Calcined Pozzolan Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
4. Silica Fume Content: Maximum 5 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
5. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.
6. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M.
7. Maximum Slump: 3 inches.
8. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4" inch.
2.06 MIXING
A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
3.02 SUBBASE
A. See Section 321123 for construction of base course for work of this Section.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.
3.04 REINFORCEMENT
A. Place reinforcement at midheight of slabs-on-grade.
B. Interrupt reinforcement at contraction joints.
C. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed.
2 - 321313 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3.05 COLD AND HOT WEATHER CONCRETING
A. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
B. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
C. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is
wet or frozen.
3.06 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints and dowels are not disturbed
during concrete placement.
C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined
construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.
3.07 JOINTS
A. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints.
B. Place 3/8 inch wide expansion joints at 20 foot intervals and to separate paving from vertical
surfaces and other components and in pattern indicated.
1. Form joints with joint filler extending from bottom of pavement to within 1/2 inch of finished
surface.
2. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
C. Provide scored joints:
1. At 5 feet intervals.
3.08 FINISHING
A. Finish al site concrete work to match existing
3.09 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section
014000.
1. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed
firm.
B. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete
test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed.
1. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under
same conditions as concrete it represents.
2. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken.
C. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air
temperature, and test samples taken.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Do not permit pedestrian or vehicular traffic over pavement for 7 days minimum after finishing or
until 75% of design strength is achieved.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 3
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 321400
UNIT PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Concrete unit pavers set in mortar setting bed.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Concrete pavers.
2. Expansion joints, all components.
3. Paver sealer
4. Masonry Cleaner
B. Samples for Verification:
1. Submit five product samples of full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated in sets for
each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in
these characteristics.
C. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts showing the full range
of colors for selection by Architect.
D. Joint Sealant Samples for Initial Selection: Submit Manufacturer's full range of colors for
selection by Architect.
E. Grout Samples for Verification: Submit three 4 inch long product samples of the colored grout
selected by Architect installed between unit pavers or as required to show the full range of
colors to be expected in the finish work.
F. Joint Sealant Sample for Verification: Submit three 4 inch long product samples of the colored
grout selected by Architect installed between unit pavers or as required to show the full range of
colors to be expected in the finish work.
G. Expansion Joint Filler Material: Submit one 12 inch length.
H. Backer Rod Material: Submit one 12 inch length.
I. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
J. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From latex-additive manufacturer indicating the
following:
1. Mortar and grout containing latex additives have been tested with pavers for compatibility
and adhesion.
2. Interpretation of test results relative to mortar and grout performance and written
recommendations for installation practices needed for adhesion.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed unit paver installations
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver,joint material, and setting material from one
source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties.
C. Pre-construction Coordination: Review installation procedures and coordinate paving work with
other work affected by the unit paving work. Prior to beginning construction, coordinate critical
dimensions of pavers with flatwork, so that there is minimal paver cutting required. Field verify
August 21, 2013 UNIT PAVING 321400- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
that layout shown on Drawings coincides with paver critical dimensions by constructing mockup as
described below. Submit evidence to Owner's Representative that this coordination work has
been completed.
D. Mockups: Before installing unit pavers, build mockups for each form and pattern of unit pavers
required to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work, including same base
construction, edging, special features for expansion joints, and contiguous work as indicated:
1. Build mockups in the location as directed by Owner's Representative and of approximately
10 by 10 foot size with all joint types in place including one expansion joint.
2. Build mockups in advance of concrete forms being laid out or constructed, so that the
critical dimensions of the unit paving work may be coordinated with the surrounding
flatwork.
3. Notify Owner's Representative seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups
will be constructed.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain Owner's Representative approval of mockups before starting unit paver installation.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
8. For materials failing tests, obtain mortar and grout manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures, including the use of alternative materials to obtain optimum bond and
prevent staining.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect unit pavers and aggregate during storage and construction against soiling or
contamination from earth and other materials.
1. Cover pavers with plastic or use other packaging materials that will prevent rust marks
from steel strapping.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store liquids in tightly closed containers protected from freezing.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or
frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work
damaged by frost or freezing.
B. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Cold-Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work against freezing when atmospheric
temperature is 40 degrees Fahrenheit and falling. Heat materials to provide mortar and
grout temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees Fahrenheit. Provide the following
protection for completed portions of work for 24 hours after installation when the mean
daily air temperature is as indicated: below 40 degrees Fahrenheit, cover with
weather-resistant membrane; below 25 degrees Fahrenheit, cover with insulating blankets;
below 20 degrees Fahrenheit, provide enclosure and temporary heat to maintain
temperature above 32 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work when temperature and humidity
conditions produce excessive evaporation of setting beds and grout. Provide artificial
shade and windbreaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to
substrates with temperatures of 100 degrees Fahrenheit and higher.
3. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 or 90 degrees Fahrenheit with a wind velocity
greater than 8 mph, set pavers within 1 minute of spreading setting-bed mortar.
2 - 321400 UNIT PAVING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE PAVERS
A. Concrete Pavers:
1. Requirements: Solid, concrete paving units, ASTM C 936, made from normal-weight
aggregates in sizes and shapes indicated. Average compressive strength of 8000 PSI
with no individual less than 7300 PSI when tested to ASTM C140 standards.
2. Maximum Average Absorption: 5 percent, with no greater than 7 percent.
3. Freeze Thaw: ASTM C 67, no breakage and not greater than 1.0 percent loss in dry
weight of any individual unit when subjected to 50 freeze thaw cycles.
4. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C 418, maximum 15 cubic centimeters volume loss per 50
square centimeters with average thickness loss not exceeding 3mm.
5. The Contractor is hereby advised that some concrete pavers manufactured and delivered
will not be acceptable for use in the Work for any exposed face, edge or corner treatment,
and therefore, may require that some of the pavers be rejected for use on this Project.
a. Permissible Extent of Chippage from Edges and Corners: 1/16 inch and 1/8 inch,
respectively. The cumulative length of chips on the exposed face of a single unit shall
not exceed 2 percent of the perimeter of the exposed face of the paver, and no single
chip shall exceed 1/8 inch in length.
b. Other than chips, the paver shall be free of cracks, color and other imperfections
detracting from the appearance of a designated sample when viewed from a distance
of 5 feet.
B. Concrete Paver Types:
1. Concrete Paver Type 1 (Mortar Set):
a. Manufacturer: Hanover
b. Product: Prest Concrete Brick
c. Style: Traditional
d. Size: 6 inches x 12 inches x 2 3/8 inches
e. Color: B91187 & B91356.
f. Finish: Ground
2. Concrete Paver Type 2 (Mortar Set):
a. Manufacturer: Hanover
b. Product: Prest Concrete Brick
c. Style: Traditional
d. Size: 4 inches x 8 inches x 2 3/8 inches
e. Color: B91187 & B91356.
f. Finish: Ground
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Expansion Joint Material: Sonneborn/ChemRex"Expansion Joint Filler." Preformed: closed-cell
polyethylene joint filler designed for use in cold joints, construction joints, or isolation joints wider
than 1/4 inch. Comply with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1.
B. Backer Rod: Sonneborn/ChemRex "Sonofoam Soft Backer Rod", non-gassing, reticulated
closed-cell polyethylene rod designed for use with cold-applied joint sealants. Comply with
ASTM C 1330. Size as required for joint design.
C. Joint Sealant: Two component, self-leveling, slope-grade elastomeric polyurethane sealant for
horizontal joints: Sonneborn/ChemRex"Sonolastic SL 2"with plus or minus 25 percent
movement capability for horizontal joints; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25; FS
TT-S-00227E, Type I, Class A. Color to be selected by Architect from Sonneborn's Rainbow of
Colors palette.
D. Sealant Primer: Sonneborn/ChemRex"Primer No. 733" solvent based primer for preparing
concrete surfaces for adhesion to sealant.
August 21, 2013 UNIT PAVING 321400- 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
E. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type recommended by sealant manufacturer and
compatible with joint forming materials.
F. Bond Breaker: 15 pound asphalt impregnated felt.
1. Comply with ASTM D266-97A.
2. Cut into 18 inch wide strips.
3. Install centered over expansion joints and contraction joints in concrete slab.
G. Welded Wire Fabric Sheets: Hot-dip galvanized, welded, 12 gauge diameter wire; 2-by-2-inch
mesh; comply with ASTM A 123, ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size.
H. New Masonry Detergent for cleaning masonry after installation.
1. Detergent based solution designed for cleaning new masonry. NMD 80-New Masonry
Detergent , by EACo Chemical Inc., New Castle, PA, Tele:800-313-8505. Or approved
equal.
2.03 PAVER SEALER
A. A silane/siloxane water-borne emulsion penetrating sealer for use on concrete and masonry
surfaces.
B. Masco"Masco-Seal Siloxane 12 WB"or equal.
2.04 MORTAR SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
B. Sand: ASTM C 144.
C. Latex Additive: Acrylic-resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber water emulsion serving as
replacement for part or all of gauging water, of type specifically recommended by latex additive
manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.
Weather, frost, shock resistant complying with ANSI A118.4 test and equal to Laticrete 3701
Mortar Admixture.
D. Water: Potable.
2.05 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement unfading
mineral pigments as required to produce required color.
B. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard acrylic-resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber water
emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically
recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed sand-portland cement
grout.
C. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturer's written instructions for mix
proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing times, and other
procedures needed to produce setting-bed and joint materials of uniform quality and with
optimum performance characteristics. Discard mortars when they have reached their initial set.
B. Mortar-Bed Bond Coat: Mix neat cement or cement and sand with water to a creamy
consistency.
1. For latex-modified portland cement setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for part
or all of water per directions of latex-additive manufacturer.
C. Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Setting-Bed Mortar(Thin-set): Weather, frost, shock resistant
complying with ANSI 118.4 and ANSI 118.11 test and equal to Laticrete 254 Platinum
D. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Slurry Bond Coat: Weather, frost, shock resistant complying
with ANSI 118.11 test and equal to Laticrete 254 Platinum
4- 321400 UNIT PAVING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
E. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Grout: Laticrete 1500 Sanded Grout mixed with Laticrete 1776
Grout Admixture, or approved equal. Proportion of sanded grout to admixture to comply with
written instructions of latex-additive manufacturer.
1. Pigmented Grout: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color
required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10, by weight.
2. Colored-Aggregate Grout: Produce color required by combining colored sand with
portland cement of selected color.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Where pavers are to be installed over waterproofing, examine waterproofing installation,
with waterproofing Installer present, for protection from paving operations. Examine areas
where waterproofing system is turned up or flashed against vertical surfaces and
horizontal waterproofing. Proceed with installation only after protection is in place.
B. Verify that concrete base is sloped for drainage and is free of standing water, dust, oil, grease,
paint, wax, curing compounds, primer, sealers, form release agents, or any deleterious
substances and debris which may prevent or reduce bonding. Conduct moisture tests to verify
that concrete surfaces are completely cured, free from hydrostatic pressure and having a
moisture content of less than 5 percent.
C. Verify that grout materials can be cleaned from pavers, or provide coating to pavers to facilitate
removal of grout materials.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove substances, from concrete substrates, that could impair mortar bond, including curing
and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.
B. Neutralize any trace of strong acid or alkali from the substrate prior to mortar application.
C. Remove substances, protrusions and fins from concrete acting as edge restraints that could
impair tight joints.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, and voids,which exceed the tolerances listed under
Part 2. Do not use unit pavers outside the approved color range or unit pavers with
discolorations and other defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished work.
B. Pavers shall be clean and free of foreign materials prior to installation. Clean mortar-set pavers
of laitance.
C. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors
and textures.
D. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped
edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units
without cutting where possible. Where cutting is required, use the largest size unit possible.
Avoid the use of pieces smaller than 3 inches, or joint spaces greater than 7/16 inch.
1. Block splitter may be not used. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
E. Exercise care in handling coated brick pavers to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs
or edges of other units. Remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting brick.
F. Joint Pattern: As indicated on Drawings. Path widths to be composed of whole, uncut pavers
unless otherwise indicated. Pavers are to be cut to fit at intersections and when abutting walls
and thresholds.
G. Tolerances: do not exceed 1/32-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) or 1/8 inch in 10 feet
from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.
August 21, 2013 UNIT PAVING 321400- 5
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
H. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant-filled joints at locations and of widths
indicated. Provide joint filler and backer rod for sealant-filled joints where indicated. Install joint
filler before setting pavers. .
3.04 MORTAR SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
A. Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove
surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply cement-paste bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes before
placing setting bed. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed.
Do not exceed 1/16-inch thickness for bond coat.
C. Place reinforcing wire over concrete base, lapped at joints by at least one full mesh and
supported so mesh becomes embedded in the middle of setting bed. Spread and screed
setting bed to uniform thickness at subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers
to finished grades indicated. Hold edges of mesh back from vertical surfaces approximately 1/2
inch. Cut fabric at expansion joints.
D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with pavers before initial set.
Cut back, bevel edge, remove, and discard setting-bed material that has reached initial set
before placing pavers.
E. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers on setting
bed, apply uniform 1/16-inch-thick, slurry bond coat to bed and to back of each paver with a flat
trowel.
F. Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed
and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single operation
before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb pavers for purposes of
realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
G. Spaced Joint Widths: 3/8 inch joints, with variations not exceeding plus or minus 1/16 inch.
H. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed.
1. Store grout at 70 degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 24 hours prior to installation.
2. For concrete pavers with grouted joints, apply paver sealer to the top surface of pavers,
avoiding any application of sealer into joints to be grouted. Allow sealer to dry completely
before grouting joints.
3. Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining surfaces.
4. Clean pavers as grouting progresses by dry brushing or rubbing with dry burlap to remove
smears before tooling joints.
5. Tool exposed joints slightly concave, or as directed by Owner's Representative, when
thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
6. If tooling squeezes grout from joints, remove excess grout and smears by dry brushing or
rubbing with dry burlap and tool joints again to produce a uniform appearance.
I. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days, unless otherwise recommended
by grout or liquid-latex manufacturer.
3.05 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units (color, spacing and elevation)as intended at no
additional cost to the Owner. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same
manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement at no
additional cost to the Owner.
B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with grout. Point up
joints at sealant joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for sealant
application.
C. Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean per
manufacturer's written instructions.
6- 321400 UNIT PAVING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
3.06 PAVER AND JOINT SEALER
A. After pavers are thoroughly cleaned and expansion joint backer rod and sealant has been
installed, apply paver sealer to the tops of pavers and gout joints.
1. Allow pavers to air dry completely after cleaning, prior to sealing.
2. Test seal one paver for compatibility with sealer and for approval by Architect.
3. Upon approval by Architect, seal concrete pavers with concrete sealer per manufacturer's
written instructions.
4. After sealer is applied, protect area from traffic for 24 hours.
END OF SECTION
August 21, 2013 UNIT PAVING 321400 - 7
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 323113
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fence framework, fabric, and accessories.
B. Excavation for post bases; concrete foundation for posts and center drop for gates.
C. Manual gates and related hardware.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete anchorage for posts.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2012.
B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
C. ASTM F567 - Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence; 2011.
D. CLFMI CLF 2445- Product Manual; Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; 1997.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and hardware.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Materials and Components: Conform to CLFMI Product Manual.
B. Fabric Size: CLFMI Standard Industrial, Heavy Residential service.
C. Intermediate Posts: Type I round.
D. Terminal, Corner, Rail, Brace, and Gate Posts: Type I round.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Caps: Cast steel galvanized; sized to post diameter, set screw retainer.
B. Fittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends, tension bars, fasteners and fittings; steel.
C. Hardware for Single Swinging Gates: 180 degree hinges, 2 for gates up to 60 inches high, 3 for
taller gates; fork latch with gravity drop and padlock hasp; keeper to hold gate in fully open
position.
D. Privacy Slats: Vinyl strips, sized to fit fabric weave, black color.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Components (Other than Fabric): Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M, at 1.7
oz/sq ft.
B. Hardware: Hot-dip galvanized to weight required by ASTM A153/A153M.
C. Accessories: Same finish as framing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install framework, fabric, accessories and gates in accordance with ASTM F567.
B. Place fabric on outside of posts and rails.
August 21, 2013 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core&Shell Improvements
Permit Set
C. Set intermediate posts plumb. Secure both top and bottom to structure. Allow for 3/4 inch
deflection of structure in top connection.
D. Brace each gate and corner post to adjacent line post with horizontal center brace rail and
diagonal truss rods. Install brace rail one bay from end and gate posts.
E. Provide top rail through line post tops and splice with 6 inch long rail sleeves.
F. Install center brace rail on corner gate leaves.
G. Position bottom of fabric 2 inches above finished grade.
H. Fasten fabric to top rail, line posts, braces, and bottom tension wire with tie wire at maximum 15
inches on centers.
I. Attach fabric to end, corner, and gate posts with tension bars and tension bar clips.
J. Install bottom tension wire stretched taut between terminal posts.
K. Install gate with fabric to match fence. Install hardware.
L. Provide concrete center drop to footing depth and drop rod retainers at center of double gate
openings as required.
3.02 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch.
B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1/2 inch.
END OF SECTION
2 - 323113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 328423
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe and fittings, valves, sprinkler heads, emitters, bubblers, and accessories as required to
rehabilitate the existing irrigation system.
B. Control system.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 02300 - Earthwork -trenching.
1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. See Section 012200- Unit Prices, for additional unit price requirements.
B. Piping:
1. Basis of Measurement: By the linear foot.
2. Basis of Payment: Includes trenching, placing pipe and fittings, valves, control box, conduit
and wiring, and accessories.
C. Sprinkler Heads:
1. Basis of Measurement: By the unit.
2. Basis of Payment: Includes sprinkler head and fittings.
D. Drip Zones:
1. Basis of Measurement: By the Zone
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008.
B. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2010.
C. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
D. ASTM D2235- Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene
(ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings;2004 (Reapproved 2011).
E. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe
(SDR Series); 2009.
F. ASTM D2282 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe
(SDR-PR); 1999 (Reapproved 2005).
G. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Piping Systems; 2004 (Reapproved 2009).
H. NEMA 250- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2008.
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with site topsoil backfilling, landscape grading and delivery of
plant life.
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Prepare a plan to Indicate piping layout to water source, location of sleeves
under pavement, location and coverage of sprinkler heads, drip zones, components, plant and
landscaping features, site structures, schedule of fittings to be used.
C. Product Data: Provide component and control system and wiring diagrams.
August 21, 2013 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 328423- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
D. Samples: Provide one outlet of each type, with housing. Accepted samples may be used in the
Work.
E. Record Documents: Record actual locations of all concealed components piping system.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Provide instructions for operation and maintenance of system and controls, seasonal
activation and shutdown, and manufacturer's parts catalog.
2. Provide schedule indicating length of time each valve is required to be open to provide a
determined amount of water.
G. Maintenance Materials: Provide the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements,for additional provisions.
2. Extra Sprinkler Heads: One of each type and size.
3. Extra Valve Keys for Manual Valves: One.
4. Extra Valve Box Keys: One.
5. Extra Valve Marker Keys: One.
6. Wrenches: One for each type head core and for removing and installing each type head.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than two years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum two years of experience.
1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for piping and component requirements.
B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of
products in system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. Existing system is automatically controlled from existing controller. Landscape Contractor to
coordinate any required updating of control wires, controller, restorations and other related work
with the General Contractor.
B. Manually controlled underground irrigation system, with low point self drain.
1. Source Power: 120 volt, A., phase.
2. Low Voltage Controls: 24 volt, A.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Rain Bird Sales, Inc Clock: www.rainbird.com.
2. Toro Company Clock Irritrol by Rain Master: www.torocompany.com.
3. Weathermatic Clock: www.weathermatic.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 016000- Product Requirements.
2.02 PIPE MATERIALS
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2241; 200 psi pressure rated upstream from controls, 160 psi downstream;
solvent welded sockets.
B. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K(A); annealed temper.
C. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, regular type.
D. Fittings: Type and style of connection to match pipe.
E. Pipe Risers at Valves: 160 psi PVC pipe.
F. Solvent Cement: ASTM D2564 for PVC pipe and fittings.
G. Sleeve Material: PVC.
2- 328423 IRRIGATION SYSTEM August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
2.03 OUTLETS
A. Manufacturers: Match existing
1. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B. Outlets: Brass construction.
C. Rotary Type Sprinkler Head: Fixed type with screens; fully adjustable for flow and pressure; size
as indicated; with letter or symbol designating degree of arc and arrow indicating center of spray
pattern.
D. Spray Type Sprinkler Head: Fixed surface head.
E. Emitter: Adjustable outlet, non-clogging, pressure compensating drip line; pressure
compensating in line emitters.
F. Bubbler: Adjustable outlet with pressure compensating screen.
G. Quick Coupler: Brass construction; two-piece body.
2.04 VALVES
A. Manufacturers: Match existing
1. Substitutions: See Section 016000- Product Requirements.
B. Gate Valves: Bronze construction non-rising stem.
C. Backflow Preventers: Iron body construction, double check valve type. Test existing and replace
if required.
D. Valve Box and Cover: NDS or match existing valve cover.
E. Drain Valve: brass contructed.
2.05 CONTROLS
A. Controller: Existing; replace only if non-functional.
B. Controller: Automatic controller, microprocessor solid state control with visible readout display,
temporary override feature to bypass cycle for inclement weather, t, programmable for 7 days in
quarter hour increments, with automatic start and shutdown.
C. Controller Housing: NEMA 250 Type 3; weatherproof, watertight, with lockable access door.
D. Wire Conductors: Color coded.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify location of existing utilities.
B. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Piping layout indicated is diagrammatic only. Route piping to avoid plants, ground cover, and
structures.
B. Layout and stake locations of system components.
C. Review layout requirements with other affected work. Coordinate locations of sleeves under
paving to accommodate system.
3.03 TRENCHING
A. Trench in accordance with Section 02300.
B. Trench Size:
1. Minimum Width: 6 inches.
2. Minimum Cover Over Installed Supply Piping: 18 inches.
3. Minimum Cover Over Installed Branch Piping: 12 inches.
4. Minimum Cover Over Installed Outlet Piping: 18 inches.
August 21, 2013 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 328423- 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
C. Trench to accommodate grade changes and slope to drains.
D. Maintain trenches free of debris, material, or obstructions that may damage pipe.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. General: If required -To adjust
B. Install pipe, valves, controls, and outlets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Set outlets and box covers at finish grade elevations.
D. Provide for thermal movement of components in system.
E. Slope piping for self drainage to gravel filled well point.
F. Use threaded nipples for risers to each outlet.
G. Install control wiring in accordance with this Specification. Provide 10 inch expansion coil at
each valve to which controls are connected, and at 100 ft intervals. Bury wiring under pipe.
H. Mark valves with neoprene valve markers containing locking device. Set valve markers in pipe
risers extending from top of valve to finish grade.
I. After piping is installed, but before outlets are installed and backfilling commences, open valves
and flush system with full head of water.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 014000.
B. Prior to backfilling, test system for leakage at main piping to maintain 100 psi pressure for one
hour.
C. System is acceptable if no leakage or loss of pressure occurs and system self drains during test
period.
3.06 BACKFILLING
A. Provide clean top soil cover over piping
B. Backfill trench and compact to specified subgrade elevation. Protect piping from displacement.
3.07 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Adjust control system to achieve time cycles required.
C. Adjust head types for full water coverage as directed.
3.08 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of system, including adjusting of
sprinkler heads. Use operation and maintenance data as basis for demonstration.
3.09 MAINTENANCE
A. See Section 017000 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to
maintenance service.
B. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.
C. Provide one complete spring start-up and a fall shutdown by installer, at no extra cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION
4 - 328423 IRRIGATION SYSTEM August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 329000
LANDSCAPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Work under this section includes preparation of subgrade, providing topsoil, green roof
substrate media, fine grading, soil amendment, providing plants, planting maintenance, water,
mulch, and accessories.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit samples in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals:
1. Submit 1/4 cubic foot sample of topsoil. Include written statement giving location of
properties from which conventional soil is to be obtained.
2. Submit 1/4 cubic foot sample of substrate media as described in Section 07599, Part 2, 2.2.
3. Submit 1/4 cubic foot sample of mulch.
B. Schedules:
1. Submit a planting schedule prior to beginning work indicating dates, location and types of
work expected to be performed.
2. Once accepted, revise dates only as approved in writing, after documentation of reasons
for revision.
C. Certifications:
1. Submit certificates of inspection of plant materials as required by governmental authorities
having jurisdiction.
2. Submit manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer
materials.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Subcontract the landscaping work to a single firm specializing in landscape work
and licensed with the State of Board of Landscape Contractors.
B. Trees, Shrubs and Plants:
1. Provide quantity, size, genus, species and variety shown and specified, and complying with
recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z 60.1.
2. Trees and shrubs of larger size than specified may be used if acceptable to Landscape
Architect, and if sizes of root balls are increased proportionately.
3. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the
locality of the project free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, defects such as knots,
sun-scald, injuries, and abrasions or disfigurements.
4. Where formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs are shown, select
stock for uniform height and spread.
5. Label at least one plant of each type with a securely attached waterproof tab bearing
legible designation of botanical and common name.
C. Availability of Materials:
1. Submit source and proof of having secured plant materials for each plant specified to be
installed 60 days before plant installation or 30 days prior to end of digging season,
whichever date come first after contract award.
2. When specified landscape material is reportedly not obtainable, submit proof of
non-availability and a written proposal for use of equivalent materials within thirty days after
date of construction contract award.
D. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer's certified analysis.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver packaged materials in manufacturer's unopened containers, fully identified by name,
brand, type, weight and analysis.
August 21, 2013 LANDSCAPING 329000- 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. Deliver and store materials to prevent deterioration, damage or intrusion of foreign matter.
C. Deliver trees, shrubs and ground covers after preparations for planting have been completed
and the irrigation system is operational. Then plant immediately:
1. Provide freshly dug trees and shrubs.
2. Protect trunks and branches from damage.
3. Protect root systems from drying out.
4. Do not prune prior to delivery.
5. Do not drop balled and burlapped stock during delivery.
6. Provide shade for plant material if planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery to
site. Water as required to keep root ball moist.
D. Do not remove container grown stock from containers until planting time.
1.05 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Execute work in an orderly and careful manner with due consideration for surrounding areas,
plantings or structures which are to remain:
1. Protect adjacent property and improvements from work damage.
2. Repair damage as acceptable to Owner.
B. Protect improvements from damage, soiling or discoloration.
C. Examine finish grades, verify elevations, observe conditions under which work is to be
performed, and correct unsatisfactory conditions.
D. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as adverse
drainage conditions, notify Owner and propose remedies before proceeding.
E. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become
available, working within the seasonal limitations for each type of planting work required.
F. Utilities: Determine location of utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible
damage, hand excavate as required.
G. Environmental Requirements:
1. Plant or install materials during normal planting seasons for each type of planting required.
2. Planting shall not be permitted during the following conditions:
a. Cold Weather: Less than 32 degrees F.
b. Hot Weather: Greater than 90 degrees F.
c. Wet Weather: Saturated soil.
d. Windy Weather: Wind velocity greater than 30 mph.
H. Prepare soil only when soil is not saturated, muddy or frozen.
1.06 SCHEDULING
A. Provide the following notices to the Owner:
1. In advance of plant material delivery so that plants may be observed upon site delivery: 36
hours.
2. Before Owner is to assume maintenance responsibility: 7 days.
3. Before time requested for inspection for Substantial Completion: 72 hours, in writing.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Remove rejected plant materials immediately from project site and provide satisfactory
replacements 48 hours or other time period mutually agreed upon with owner.
B. Remove and replace trees, shrubs and ground cover that die shown unsatisfactory growth, or
are in unhealthy condition. Final replacement decision is at the discretion of the Owner or
Owner's Representative.
C. Make repairs and replacements other than plant materials within five days following observation
or receipt of Owner's notice.
D. Furnish plant replacements which comply with requirements shown on drawings or specified.
2 - 329000 LANDSCAPING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
E. Warrant all materials and workmanship for all causes until Final Acceptance. After Final
Acceptance warrant all materials and workmanship for all causes except for defects resulting
from neglect, abuse or damage by the Owner, for a period of one year.
1.08 MAINTENANCE
A. During period between planting and installation acceptance, provide fertilizer, weeding,
spraying, resetting of unstable plants and other maintenance necessary to assure healthy
growth. In addition, maintain 90 days (minimum) after Installation Acceptance. Continue
maintenance until Final Acceptance of planting or project substantial completion whichever is
later. No pruning is to be done by Contractor.
B. Maintain trees, shrubs and other plants by:
1. Weekly clean-up and weeding.
2. Tighten and repair stakes guy supports. Reset trees and groundcover to proper grades or
vertical position as required.
3. Spray as required to keep plant material free of insects and disease.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Soil for landscape work is not available at site and must be furnished from other sources:
1. Obtain topsoil from local sources.
2. Topsoil shall be sandy loam, obtained from naturally, well-drained sites where soil occurs
in a depth of not less than 4 inches; do not obtain from bogs or marshes.
3. Provide new topsoil which is fertile, friable natural surface soil, free of subsoil, clay lumps
or clods of hard earth, brush, weeds, stumps, roots, other litter, sticks, gravel and stones,
and other extraneous material or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. Remove debris,
rock, gravel, clods and other undesirable materials, whether discovered before or after
placement.
B. Greenroof Substrate Media: Refer to Section 07599, Part 2, 2.2: Green Roofing Material
Description.
C. Bone Meal: Horticultural grade material.
D. Super Phosphate: Horticultural grade material.
E. Humus: Use the following:
1. Garden Care Compost: Provide from local sources.
2. Kosher Steer Manure Mix, or approved equal.
F. Gypsum: Horticultural grade material.
G. Fertilizer: Controlled release commercial fertilizer, tablets or granular form. Complete fertilizer of
neutral character, with some elements derived from organic sources and containing the
following percentages of available plant nutrients:
1. For trees and groundcover, provide fertilizer with not less than 5% total nitrogen, 10%
available phosphoric acid and 5% soluble potash.
H. Water: From existing irrigation
I. Plants: Provide sufficient plants to complete work shown on drawings:
1. Provide plants free of disease, injury and insect infestation; and full foliage when in-leaf.
2. Cold storage stock is unacceptable.
3. Container stock: Grown in container at least 6 months without root bind.
4. Do not provide conifers which have been sheared or trimmed. Provide only plants having
natural form and composition.
5. Provide weed free field gathered plant materials where necessary. Collect or obtain
materials using proper horticultural practices and only from licensed sources.
6. Plants of the same species are to be planted in geometric patterns, shall be matched to
look the same in size, texture, color, and health.
August 21, 2013 LANDSCAPING 329000 - 3
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core& Shell Improvements
Permit Set
J. Trees:
1. Trees shall be of height and caliper scheduled or shown and with branching configuration
recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and species required. Single stem trees shall be
provided except where special forms are shown or listed.
2. Trees shall be balled and burlapped (B&B)and matched by species.
3. Container grown trees will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped trees subject to
specified limitations for container grown stock.
4. Street trees shall have a minimum height of 6 feet 6 inches to the lowest branch.
K. Ground Cover:
1. Ground cover shall be plants established and well rooted in removable containers, and
with not less than minimum number of and length of runners required by ANSI Z60.1 for
the pot size indicated on the drawings. Groundcover plants shall be matched in size,
health, and condition.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Tree Staking Material on Grade:
1. Tree Staking Material: Provide for street trees:
a. Vertical Stakes: 2"x2"x8' of sound new, treated fir, Hemlock, or other softwood, or
Redwood, free of knot holes and other defects.
b. Tree Ties: "Arbor-Tie" deep root partners,www.deeproot.com, (415)437-9700, San
Francisco, CA, or approved equal. Tree ties in required lengths and of uniform color,
material and size to protect tree trunks from damage. Flat woven polypropylene
material 3/4" 900 lb. burlap strength. Color: green, one tie per stake.
B. Mulch: Medium to fine ground Hemlock bark (color Dark Brown). Provide in plant beds to a
minimum depth of 3 inches.
C. Anti-Desiccant: Emulsion type, film-forming agent designed to permit transpiration but retard
excessive loss of moisture from plants, "Wilt Pruf'or equal.
D. Bio Barrier: Plastic physical barrier"deep root" or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine for site conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, quality of work and
survival of plants and lawns.
B. Begin work required under this Section after conditions are satisfactory: start of work denotes
acceptance by Contractor and he/she assumes responsibility for final results.
C. Verify that grades and slopes of planting areas insure positive drainage and that they are
acceptable to Landscape Architect prior to commending work of this Section.
D. Install plantings only after soil preparation and fine grading is completed.
E. Install plantings only in areas where the irrigation system is installed and fully operational.
F. Proceed with and complete the planting work as rapidly as portions of the site become
available, working within the seasonal limitation for each kind of planting work required.
G. Plant trees and groundcover after final grades are established.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protection:
1. Protect adjacent property and site improvements from work damage, including staining,
soiling or discoloring and replace portions damaged through this operation.
B. Preparation:
1. Locate and securely mark or flag irrigation components, area drains, catch basins,
cleanouts, manholes, valve boxes and other site improvements not extending more than 6
inches above finish grade.
4- 329000 LANDSCAPING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
2. Planting Area Preparation:
a. Tree and ground cover planting beds on grade shall be prepared as follows:
1) Till into the subgrade 4 inches of topsoil, bone meal, super phosphate, and 2
cubic yards per 1,000 square feet of the humus, prior to placing topsoil.
Thoroughly mix into a depth of 6 inches.
2) Spread remaining topsoil to depth required and as needed to meet grades, after
adding amendments, light rolling, watering and natural settlement. Grade shall
be kept 2 inches below adjacent finish surfaces.
3) Place remainder of soil amendment, spread evenly and thoroughly mix into
planting area to a depth of 6 inches.
4) Tree Planting in Existing Lawn: Pocket plant- Refer to Drawings.
3. Grading:
a. Limit fine grading to areas scheduled to be planted immediately.
b. Bring ground cover planting areas to relatively smooth, even grades and slopes by
dragging, hand raking and other appropriate methods. Water thoroughly to assure
settlement.
c. Establish vertical curves or rounding at abrupt changes in slope to provide a smooth
and gradual grade transition.
4. Lay out individual tree and groundcover locations and areas for multiple planting. Stake or
flag locations and outline areas and allow observation by Landscape Architect before start
of planting work. Make minor adjustments as requested.
5. Remove gravel, debris, and other deleterious materials (including weeds and roots)from
planting areas.
6. Kill and remove all weeds as necessary at all stages of work.
C. Excavation for Trees and Groundcover on Grade:
1. Excavate pits, beds, and trenches with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation, slightly
raised at center to provide proper drainage. Loosen hard subsoil on sides and in bottom of
excavation. Excavate entire 3'x9'tree wells at street sidewalks.
2. Make excavations as detailed.
3. Dispose of excess subsoil removed from planting excavations. Do not spread over planting
areas.
4. Scarify sides and bottom of hole with a shovel or other tool to allow interfacing of root ball
soil.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Planting Trees and Groundcover on grade: Set plumb:
1. Place with top of ball at 1 inch to 2 inches above adjacent finished landscape grades.
2. Remove wire baskets from roots.
3. Remove twine from burlap root balls; turn down 50% of burlap from ball before backfill.
4. When plants are set, place additional soil mix around base and sides of ball and work each
layer to settle soil mix and eliminate voids and air pockets.
5. When excavation is approximately b full, water thoroughly before placing remainder of
backfill.
6. Thoroughly water each plant again after placing final layer of backfill.
7. Stake as shown on drawings immediately after planting.
B. Groundcover Planting:
1. Space plants as shown on drawings or as specified.
2. Dig holes within planting beds large enough to allow for spreading of roots.
3. Backfill with prepared topsoil free of subsoil or sand.
4. Complete planting by working soil around roots to eliminate air pockets, and firm hand
taking care not to cover crowns.
5. Water thoroughly after planting.
C. Tree Staking On Grade: As shown on drawing and as specified:
August 21, 2013 LANDSCAPING 329000 - 5
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
1. Drive stake plum outside root ball and 3-feet deep to furnish necessary support.
2. Secure with tree ties.
D. Mulching on Grade: Provide 3-inch thick minimum over entire plant bed and 3' diameter areas
around street trees in lawn areas, within two days after planting:
1. Prevent mulch contact with plant foliage.
2. Mulch shall be pulled away from trunks and crowns of shrubs, and cleaned off paved areas
and structures.
E. Anti-Desiccant:
1. Use anti-desiccant spray at nursery on deciduous trees or shrubs that are moved in
full-leaf before moving, again 2 weeks after planting.
2. Apply anti-desiccant using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks, branches,
stems, twigs and foliage.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Remove and replace excessively pruned or misformed stock resulting from improper pruning.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Keep project site reasonably free from safety hazards, accumulation of debris, soil and other
materials:
1. Clean up equipment, excess materials and debris from project site upon work completion
of each area of work or sooner, if directed.
2. Leave project site in neat and tidy condition.
B. Remove soil and amendment mixes from walks and paving on a daily basis.
C. Broom and hose down areas daily as necessary to maintain clean pavement.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION
A. When inspected landscape work does not comply with drawing or specification requirements,
replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until reinspected by Landscape
Architect and found acceptable.
B. Upon completion of landscape work, the Owner will inspect the site to determine if Installation
Acceptance has been reached.
C. Materials not meeting quality conditions, size or other requirements specifications will be
rejected and immediately removed from the site.
D. 90 days, or later, following installation acceptance, the Owner will inspect the site and determine
final acceptance.
E. 1 year following final acceptance, the Owner will inspect the site to determine the condition of
materials provided under this Contract.
F. Landscape work will be inspected for the entire project at one time and not in parts:
1. Fees for normal inspections and tests will be paid by the Owner.
2. Additional inspections and tests required because of defective work or ill-timed notices will
be at the Contractor's expense.
G. Another inspection will be conducted at end of extended warranty periods, to determine
acceptance or rejection.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by
other contractors and trades, and trespassers:
1. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
2. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed.
END OF SECTION
6- 329000 LANDSCAPING August 21, 2013
GBD Architects Greenway Town Center 20136090
Whole Foods Core & Shell Improvements
Permit Set
SECTION 334111
SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Storm drainage piping, fittings, and accessories.
B. Connection of drainage system to municipal sewers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 02300 - Earthwork- Excavation and backfill
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer
Pipe; 2012a.
B. ASTM C76M - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer
Pipe [Metric]; 2012a.
C. ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber
Gaskets; 2012.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating pipe, pipe accessories.
C. Project Record Documents:
1. Record location of pipe runs, connections, cleanouts, and invert elevations.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for materials and installation of the Work of this section.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate the Work with termination of storm sewer connection outside building, trenching,
connection to municipal sewer utility service.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS
A. Concrete Pipe: Reinforced, ASTM C 76 (ASTM C 76M), Class II with Wall type A; mesh
reinforcement; bell and spigot end joints.
B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), flexible plastiv(bitumen)
gasket joint. Gaskets shall comply with AASHTO M-198 751, Type B, and shall be installed in
strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 667 and D 2416 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe with joints in accordance
with ASTM D 3212 and F 477.
2.02 PIPE ACCESSORIES
A. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required
tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required.
B. Trace Wire: 18 Ga. magnetic detectable conductor, insulated copper; green in color.
2.03 CATCH BASIN, TRENCH DRAIN, CLEANOUT, AND AREA DRAIN COMPONENTS
A. Lids and Drain Covers: Cast iron, hinged to cast iron frame.
1. Catch Basin:
2. Lid Design: Checkerboard grill.
2.04 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS
A. Bedding:As specified in Section 02300.
August 21, 2013 SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334111 - 1
20136090 Greenway Town Center GBD Architects
Whole Foods Core &Shell Improvements
Permit Set
B. Cover: As specified in Section 02300.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 TRENCHING
A. See Section 02300 for additional requirements.
B. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.
C. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then
complete backfilling.
3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPE
A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are
as indicated on layout drawings.
B. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal
watertight.
C. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on layout drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of
1/8 inch in 10 feet.
D. Connect to building storm drainage system, foundation drainage system, and utility/municipal
sewer system.
E. Install continuous trace wire 6 inches above top of pipe; coordinate with Section 02300.
3.03 INSTALLATION -CATCH BASINS, TRENCH DRAINS AND CLEANOUTS
A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation.
B. Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad, with provision for sanitary sewer pipe end
sections.
C. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated.
D. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect pipe and bedding cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in
progress.
END OF SECTION
2 - 334111 SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING August 21, 2013